Printronix Printer ThermaLine Series User Manual

R
ThermaLinet Series Label Printers  
IGP/PGL  
Programmer's Reference Manual  
 
ThermaLinet Series Label Printers  
IGP/PGL  
Programmer's Reference Manual  
R
P/N 136458–001, Rev B  
 
Printronix, Inc. makes no representations or warranties of any kind regarding  
this material, including, but not limited to, implied warranties of  
merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. Printronix, Inc. shall not  
be held responsible for errors contained herein or any omissions from this  
material or for any damages, whether direct, indirect, incidental or  
consequential, in connection with the furnishing, distribution, performance or  
use of this material. The information in this manual is subject to change  
without notice.  
This document contains proprietary information protected by copyright. No  
part of this document may be reproduced, copied, translated or incorporated  
in any other material in any form or by any means, whether manual, graphic,  
electronic, mechanical or otherwise, without the prior written consent of  
Printronix, Inc.  
All rights reserved.  
17500 Cartwright Road, P.O. Box 19559  
Irvine, California 92713  
Telephone (714) 863–1900 FAX (714) 660–8682  
Technical Support (714) 221–2686  
COPYRIGHT 1995, PRINTRONIX, INC.  
 
Trademark Acknowledgments  
IBM and IBM PC are registered trademarks of International Business  
Machines Corp.  
Printronix is a registered trademark of Printronix, Inc.  
IGP is a registered trademark of Printronix, Inc.  
ThermaLine is a registered trademark of Printronix, Inc.  
PSA is a trademark of Printronix, Inc.  
Scalable type outlines are licensed from Agfa Corporation. Agfa is a  
registered trademark of Agfa–Gevaert, AG. CG, Garth Graphic, Intellifont,  
and Type Director are registered trademarks of Agfa Corporation, and  
Shannon and CG Triumvirate are trademarks of Agfa Corporation. CG  
Bodoni, CG Century Schoolbook, CG Goudy Old Style, CG Melliza,  
Microstyle, CG Omega, and CG Palacio are products of Agfa Corporation.  
CG Times, based on Times New Roman under license from The Monotype  
Corporation Plc is a product of Agfa Corporation.  
Univers is a registered trademark of Linotype AG and/or its subsidiaries.  
Letraset is a registered trademark, and Aachen, Revue and University Roman  
are trademarks of Esselte Pendaflex Corporation.  
Futura is a registered trademark of Fundición Tipográfica Neufville, S.A.  
ITC Avant Garde Gothic, ITC Benguiat, ITC Bookman, ITC Century, ITC  
Cheltenham, ITC Clearface, ITC Galliard, ITC Korinna, ITC Lubalin Graph,  
ITC Souvenir, ITC Tiepolo, ITC Zapf Chancery, and ITC Zapf Dingbats are  
registered trademarks of International Typeface Corporation.  
Albertus, Gill Sans, and Times New Roman are registered trademarks, and  
Monotype Baskerville is a trademark of The Monotype Corporation Plc,  
registered in the U.S. Pat. and TM office and elsewhere.  
Hiroshige and Marigold are trademarks of AlphaOmega Typography, Inc.  
HP is a registered trademark of Hewlett–Packard Company.  
 
 
Table of Contents  
1
Introduction  
About this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2  
How to Locate Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2  
Warnings and Special Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2  
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3  
How the IGP/PGL Operates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–5  
Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–7  
Normal Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–7  
Quiet Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–9  
Create Form Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–9  
Create Logo Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–11  
Execute Form Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–11  
Configuration Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–13  
Alphanumeric Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–17  
Incremental Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–17  
2
Configuration  
Configuring the IPG/PGL with the Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2  
The IGP/PGL Emulation Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3  
Define CR Code (Carriage Return) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4  
Define LF Code (Line Feed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4  
Autowrap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4  
Select SFCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4  
Select Font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–5  
Auto Eject . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–5  
Select LPI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–5  
Auto Uppercase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6  
Skip Command Prefix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6  
Table of Contents  
i
 
Power On IGP/PGL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6  
Extended Execute Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6  
UPC Descenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–7  
Host Form Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–7  
IGP100 Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–7  
3
4
PTX_Setup  
PTX_Setup Command Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2  
PTX_Setup Command Parameters and Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–4  
DISK_IO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–4  
ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5  
PTX_Setup Command Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–6  
Commands  
IGP/PGL Command Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3  
Special Function Control Character (SFCC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3  
Semicolon (;) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3  
Uppercase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3  
Inline Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3  
Line Terminator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4  
Printable Character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4  
Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5  
Command Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5  
Form Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5  
Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6  
Numeric Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6  
Comments in Command Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6  
Storing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6  
Uncompressed and Packed Bits Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–7  
Character Position.Dot Position (CP.DP) Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–7  
Data Fields for Alphanumeric and Incremental Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–9  
Fixed Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–9  
ii  
Table of Contents  
 
Overlay Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–9  
Dynamic Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–9  
Incremental Data Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–10  
Dark Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–10  
Thermal Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–10  
Line-Matrix Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–10  
Alphanumerics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–12  
Alphanumerics, Incremental Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–18  
Using Incremental Alphanumeric Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–18  
Alphanumerics, Incremental: Fixed Data Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–22  
Alphanumerics, Incremental: Dynamic Data Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–25  
Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–30  
Compressed Print (Density) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–33  
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–34  
Corners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–36  
Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–39  
Delete Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–41  
Delete Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–42  
Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–43  
Duplication, Horizontal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–44  
Duplication, Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–46  
End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–48  
Execute Form Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–49  
How to Use the Execute Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–49  
Print Formats in the Execute Form Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–50  
Execute Form: General Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–51  
Execute Form: Dynamic Alphanumeric Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–54  
Execute Form: Dynamic Bar Code Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–55  
Execute Form: Incremental Dynamic Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–56  
Supplying Dynamic Data for Incremental Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–57  
Execute Form: Overlay Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–59  
Expanded Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–60  
Font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–61  
Table of Contents  
iii  
 
Form Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–64  
Ignore Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–65  
Line Spacing, Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–66  
Lines, Horizontal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–67  
Lines, Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–69  
Listen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–71  
Logo Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–72  
Logo Mode, Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–74  
Normal Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–77  
Page Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–78  
Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–79  
PCX Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–81  
Print File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–83  
Quiet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–84  
Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–85  
Reverse Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–86  
Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–88  
Select Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–90  
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–91  
TIFF Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–92  
5
Bar Codes  
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–2  
User–Defined Variable Bar Code Ratios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4  
PDF Character Sizes [PDF [;LOC] [;FONT] (T)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–16  
Code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–17  
Code 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–24  
Codabar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–31  
Code 128B and Code 128C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–38  
Code UCC–128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–47  
EAN 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–53  
EAN 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–60  
iv  
Table of Contents  
 
FIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–67  
Interleaved 2/5 (I–2/5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–74  
MSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–81  
PDF417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–88  
POSTNET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–94  
UPC–A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–100  
UPC–E and UPC–E0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–107  
Incremental Bar Code Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–116  
Incrementing Bar Code Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–117  
Incremental Bar Code Fixed Data Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–120  
Incremental Bar Code Dynamic Data Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–123  
Duplicating Incremental Bar Code Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–124  
6
Form Examples and Exercises  
Form Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–2  
Example: Using the Setup Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–5  
Example: Dynamic Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–5  
Example: Auto Increment Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–14  
Form Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–19  
Logo Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–32  
Form Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–37  
Directory Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–47  
Delete Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–48  
Solving Program Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–49  
7
Multinational Character Sets  
About the Multinational Character Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–2  
Character Sets Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–2  
Character Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–3  
Making Character Substitutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–3  
OCR Character Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–6  
Accessing Characters and Character Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–7  
Table of Contents  
v
 
Data Bit 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–7  
Power–Up Character Set Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–7  
User–Defined Set Command (USET) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–8  
Character Set Selection Command (ISET) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–10  
Multinational Character Set Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–11  
8
Error Codes  
The Purpose of Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–2  
Horizontal Line Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–3  
Vertical Line Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–4  
Box Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–5  
Corner Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–6  
Alpha Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–8  
Logo Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–10  
Create Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–12  
Execute Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–14  
Miscellaneous Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–16  
Bar Code Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–18  
Reverse Print Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–21  
Incremental Fields Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–22  
Multinational Character Set Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–23  
Font Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–24  
Appendices  
A
B
C
D
Standard ASCII Character Set  
Grid Programs and Samples  
Page Boundaries  
Typefaces  
Index  
vi  
Table of Contents  
 
1
Introduction  
Chapter Contents  
About this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2  
How to Locate Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2  
Warnings and Special Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2  
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3  
How the IGP/PGL Operates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–5  
Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–7  
Normal Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–7  
Quiet Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–9  
Create Form Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–9  
Create Logo Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–11  
Execute Form Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–11  
Configuration Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–13  
Alphanumeric Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–17  
Incremental Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–17  
Introduction  
1–1  
 
About this Manual  
This manual explains how to use the IGP /PGL (Intelligent Graphics  
Printing/Printronix Graphics Language). Use this manual in conjunction  
with your printer Setup Guide for complete printer–IGP/PGL compatibility.  
How to Locate Information  
You can locate information three ways:  
Use the Table of Contents at the front of the manual.  
Use the Chapter Contents list on the first page of each chapter.  
Use the alphabetical Index at the back of the manual.  
Warnings and Special Information  
Information requiring special attention is highlighted under special headings.  
Always read and comply with this information. The heading reveals the  
nature of the information:  
WARNING  
WARNING tells you of conditions that could cause you physical harm.  
CAUTION  
CAUTION tells you of conditions that could damage the printer,  
IGP/PGL, or related equipment.  
IMPORTANT  
IMPORTANT gives you information vital to proper IGP/PGL operation.  
NOTE: Provides information affecting IGP/PGL operation considered  
important enough to emphasize.  
1–2  
Introduction  
 
Features  
IGP/PGL is the Intelligent Graphics Printing firmware for the Printronix  
Graphics Language, which is designed for the new Printronix PSAt line of  
line-matrix, laser and thermal printers. The IGP/PGL provides on–line forms,  
bar codes, and many alphanumeric text–generation capabilities and is  
compatible with earlier versions of Printronix IGP protocol and  
programming. IGP/PGL graphics processing features are detailed below.  
NOTE: The ThermaLinet Series printers are not floppy disk-based  
printers. As a result, reference to disk drive ‘Aimplies the internal  
SRAM, disk drive ‘B’ corresponds to the top external memory  
module slot, and drive ‘C’ corresponds to the bottom memory  
module slot. Note also that drive ‘C‘ does not exist for the T3204  
model.  
On–Line Form and Label Generation makes it easy to create forms or  
labels with a “preprinted” look for each application. IGP/PGL programs  
control all graphic functions, dramatically reducing host computer  
programming and processing time.  
Graphic capabilities include boxes, vertical and horizontal lines with  
user–selectable thickness, logos, and special alphanumeric print features.  
Forms and graphic designs can be duplicated horizontally and vertically.  
Alphanumeric data can appear as prepositioned “fixed” information (entered  
when the form is created), can be overlayed onto the form (positioned in a  
specific location after the form is created), or may be dynamically merged  
with the form.  
Selectable Bar Codes provides you with the appropriate bar code for your  
application using standard wide–to–narrow ratios. A wide selection of bar  
codes are available: Code 39, Interleaved 2 of 5, UPC–A, UPC–E, MSI A  
through D, Code 128 Subset B and C, Code 93, EAN 8, EAN 13, POSTNET,  
FIM, and PDF–417. UPC and EAN bar codes can also specify add–on data.  
Expanded and Compressed Character Print attract attention where  
needed. Alphanumeric height and width are controlled independently for a  
wide range of character sizes up to 113 times the standard character size (up  
to 9.9 inches wide and tall). Compressed print sizes of 10 to 30 characters per  
inch (cpi) are available.  
Introduction  
1–3  
 
Rotated Alphanumerics permit new concepts in form design. Normal,  
expanded, and compressed character strings can be rotated 90 degrees  
clockwise or counterclockwise, or they can be printed upside down.  
Logos are easily created using alphanumeric commands and add a variety of  
print and shading features for a “customized” appearance to forms, reports,  
and labels. You can define the format of the logo using TIFF files and PCX  
raster data as well as the standard IGP/PGL dots.  
Reversed Print permits highlighting and contrasting by printing white  
characters on a dark background.  
Automatic Increment/Decrement Capability allows batch form  
processing. You can identify individual numeric and bar code data fields,  
which includes automatic increment or decrement functions.  
The following list summarizes the new features included in the current  
release:  
Inline Commands allows commands to appear anywhere within a line.  
This enables the FONT command to control text attributes for a text  
line. It also permits commands to be packed into a single text line to  
maintain line counting when using an IBM system.  
TIFF and PCX Raster Data File Support allowing two of the four  
TIFF file formats (uncompressed and packed bits compression formats)  
and both of the PCX raster data file formats (compressed and  
uncompressed).  
Additional Bar Codes including Code 93, an industrial bar code, and  
Codabar, a medical and package tracking bar code.  
Host Control of PSA Resources through PTX SETUP command,  
which manages those options that are common between printer  
emulations.  
1–4  
Introduction  
 
How the IGP/PGL Operates  
IGP/PGL is an emulation that allows you to print sophisticated graphics and  
bar codes.  
Depending on what the printer is doing, it is always in a particular mode,  
which is transparent to the user. These modes are discussed in more detail in  
Chapter 2.  
When the printer is receiving text or printing text, it is in Normal mode. Any  
time the printer is on and is not processing IGP/PGL commands, it is in  
Normal mode.  
When a Create Form command is issued, the printer moves from the Normal  
mode to the Create Form mode.  
During this phase, the user sends text, images, and bar code data to the  
IGP/PGL. All of this data is stored in memory. An End statement terminates  
the IGP/PGL data string. The printer returns to Normal mode.  
You can create as many forms as you wish and store them on your host or in  
external printer memory.  
All forms have filenames. You may want to print the form, label it, and store  
it for future reference. Or, you can devise another method for easy retrieval.  
These forms can then be downloaded from your host to the printer.  
When you Execute a form, you can print it as many times as you wish. This  
saves you time from downloading the form each time you want to print it.  
Introduction  
1–5  
 
Printer Operating Mode  
What It Means  
Printer receives data  
and prints text/graphics.  
Normal Mode  
Create Form Mode  
Execute Form Mode  
Normal Mode  
You send IGP commands  
to the printer.  
Printer prints the  
form designed in  
Create Form mode.  
Printer returns  
to Normal mode.  
Figure 1–1. IPG/PGL Modes  
1–6  
Introduction  
 
Modes of Operation  
The IGP/PGL has six modes of operation that use specific command  
sequences to control the IGP/PGL.  
In the Normal mode, the printer waits for a Special Function Control  
Code (SFCC) in order to perform IGP/PGL functions.  
In Quiet mode all IGP/PGL commands are ignored.  
In the Create Logo and Create Form modes, the printer produces  
graphics such as forms, logos, bar codes, and alphanumeric data.  
The Execute mode is the IGP/PGL printing mode, which controls when  
the actual printing of the bar codes and graphics will occur.  
The Configuration mode allows you to select specific IGP/PGL  
operations for running IGP/PGL files on your printer.  
Normal Mode  
Normal mode commands print data in a line printer format until a Special  
Function Control Character (SFCC) is detected.  
Commands accessible in the Normal mode are summarized in Table 1–1 and  
fully described on the referenced pages. Some Normal mode commands can  
also be used in other modes: Compressed Print, Expand, Ignore, Select  
Format, and Vertical Line Spacing, which are Normal mode commands, can  
also be used in the Execute Form mode; the Multinational Character Set  
command can be used in the Normal or Create modes. Carriage Return, Form  
Feed, Line Feed, EVFU commands, and Paper Slew commands also operate  
in the Normal mode.  
NOTE: All IGP/PGL commands must be entered in UPPERCASE, and each  
command line must be followed immediately by a line feed (or  
carriage return with line feed terminator) or a paper motion  
command.  
Introduction  
1–7  
 
Table 1–1. Normal Mode Commands  
Command  
Compressed Print  
Configuration  
Create  
Mnemonic  
Description  
Defines the horizontal print density in characters per inch (cpi).  
Reconfigures IGP/PGL parameters.  
Page #  
4–33  
DENSITY  
CONFIG  
CREATE  
4–34  
Places the IGP/PGL in the Create Form mode where all the Create Form mode  
commands are available to design form elements.  
4–39  
Create Logo  
LOGO  
Places the IGP/PGL in the Create Logo mode, where logos can be defined using  
the appropriate dot placements.  
4–74  
Delete Form  
Delete Logo  
Directory  
DELETE FORM  
DELETE LOGO  
DIRECTORY  
Deletes a selected form name from the directory and IGP/PGL memory.  
Deletes a selected logo name from the directory and IGP/PGL memory.  
4–41  
4–42  
4–43  
Provides a list of all defined forms and logos, logo assignments to forms, and  
memory usage and availability.  
Execute  
EXECUTE  
EXPAND  
FONT  
Executes a previously created form.  
4–49  
4–60  
4–61  
4–65  
Expanded Print  
Font  
Expands fonts vertically and horizontally.  
Selects a specific typeface, bold, slant (italic) factor, and symbol set.  
Ignore Sequence  
On/Off  
IGON  
IGOFF  
Enables the IGP/PGL to ignore all characters after the Ignore Sequence On  
command is sent until the Ignore Sequence Off command is sent. See Note on  
Page 1–11.  
Line Spacing,  
Vertical  
LPI  
Defines the lines per inch (lpi) printing format.  
4–66  
Listen  
LISTEN  
Removes IGP/PGL from the quiet state and enables IGP/PGL operation.  
Use a multinational character set or create a custom user–defined character set.  
4–71  
Multinational  
Character Set  
USET  
ISET  
Chapt. 6  
Normal Mode  
NORMAL  
Places the IGP/PGL in the Normal mode, where it does not change the data  
stream but awaits the SFCC followed by an IGP/PGL command.  
4–77  
4–79  
Paper  
PAPER  
Selects features such as paper cutter, print intensity, label sensor, page  
orientation (portrait/landscape), and print speed.  
Print File  
Quiet  
PRINT  
QUIET  
Prints a file from external memory  
4–83  
4–84  
IGP/PGL operation is disabled until a Listen command is received. Any data  
sent to the LinePrinter Plus Emulation is unaffected by IGP/PGL commands.  
Reset  
RESET  
Deletes all forms and logos from the IGP/PGL memory.  
4–85  
4–90  
Select Format  
On/Off  
SFON  
SFOFF  
Ignores all host–generated paper movement commands. See Note on Page  
1–11.  
Set Up  
SETUP  
Automatically executes and loads the IGP/PGL commands into the printer at  
power–up or after a RESET command is sent.  
3–2  
Printer Mode  
Scaling Mode  
PMODE  
SMODE  
Included only for compatibility; not recommended for use.  
Included only for compatibility; not recommended for use.  
N/A  
N/A  
1–8  
Introduction  
 
Quiet Mode  
In this mode, the host sends all data to the LinePrinter+ emulation without  
any IGP/PGL interpretation––the IGP/PGL is disabled and all IGP/PGL  
commands are ignored. The IGP/PGL looks only for LISTEN and  
PTX_SETUP.  
Create Form Mode  
Create Form mode commands design forms, all form components, and bar  
codes. The forms are not printed in the Create Form mode; forms are printed  
in the Execute Form mode after all form design is completed. To begin form  
design, access the Create Form mode using the Create command. The Create  
command is always used to enter the Create Form mode to begin form  
design. Remember that the CREATE command must be entered in  
UPPERCASE.  
Each element has its own specific set of commands and parameters that  
determine size, location, and content. Listed in alphabetical order, Create  
Form mode commands are summarized in Table 1–2 and fully described on  
the referenced pages.  
Print Boundaries  
Print area boundaries exist for the paper size selected. All Create Form mode  
commands require you to identify the location for the components in your  
form. Boundary checking for form elements is performed only when the  
form length is specified. This ensures that forms can be created regardless of  
the type of paper you have loaded or margins you have set. The IGP/PGL  
checks the boundaries before the form is executed to assure that it will fit on  
the loaded paper size. If the debug option is used in the Create statement, the  
boundaries are checked against the current paper size. Refer to Appendix C  
for more information regarding page boundary guidelines.  
Introduction  
1–9  
 
Table 1–2. Create Form Mode Commands  
Description  
Command  
Mnemonic  
Page #  
Alphanumerics  
ALPHA  
Defines size, location, and content of alphanumeric characters and dynamic  
alphanumeric data fields.  
4–12  
Alpha,  
Incremental  
ALPHA  
Defines starting data and increment amount for fixed auto–increment  
fields.  
4–18  
Bar Codes  
BARCODE  
Each bar code type has its own command to define size, location,  
orientation, and data as described in the “Bar Codes” chapter.  
Chapter 5  
Boxes  
BOX  
Defines size, location, and thickness of boxes.  
4–30  
4–36  
Corners  
CORNER  
Defines vertical and horizontal length, location, and thickness of a set of  
four corners.  
Duplication,  
Horizontal  
HDUP  
VDUP  
Defines the number of horizontal duplications of an element and the spacing  
between duplications.  
4–44  
4–46  
Duplication,  
Vertical  
Defines the number of vertical duplications of an element and the spacing  
between duplications.  
End  
END  
Terminates the Create Form mode.  
4–48  
4–61  
4–64  
4–65  
Font  
FONT  
LFORM  
Selects a specific typeface, bold, slant (italic) factor, and symbol set.  
Specifies the form length by total number of lines at 6 or 8 lpi.  
Form Length  
Ignore Sequence  
On/Off  
IGON  
IGOFF  
Enables the IGP/PGL to ignore all characters after the Ignore Sequence On  
command is sent until the Ignore Sequence Off command is sent.  
See Note on Page 1–11.  
Lines, Horizontal  
Lines, Vertical  
Logo Call  
HORZ  
VERT  
LOGO  
ISET  
Defines the location, size, and thickness of horizontal lines.  
Defines the location, size, and thickness of vertical lines.  
Specifies the location of a previously defined logo.  
Selects one of the 32 Multinational character sets.  
4–67  
4–69  
4–72  
Multinational  
Character Set  
Chapter 7  
Page Number  
Printer Mode  
Reset  
PAGE  
Defines the location for automatically incremented page numbers.  
Included only for compatibility; not recommended for use.  
Deletes all forms and logos from the IGP/PGL memory.  
4–78  
N/A  
PMODE  
RESET  
REVERSE  
4–85  
4–86  
Reverse Print  
Defines the location for white–on–black printing and selects the  
background shade.  
Scale  
SCALE  
Defines the vertical spacing and horizontal pitch for data positioning in  
character or dot columns and rows.  
4–88  
Scaling Mode  
SMODE  
Included only for compatibility; not recommended for use.  
N/A  
Select Format  
On/Off  
SFON  
SFOFF  
Ignores all host–generated paper movement commands.  
See Note on Page 1–11.  
4–90  
1–10  
Introduction  
 
Create Logo Mode  
The Create Logo mode is used in the Create Form mode. The Create Logo  
mode creates a logo design; this predefined logo is then “called” into a form  
in the Create Form mode. (The logo must be defined before it is “called.”)  
Execute Form Mode  
The Execute Form mode prints forms created in the Create Form mode.  
Execute Form mode commands are summarized in Table 1–3 and fully  
described on the referenced pages. Carriage Return, Form Feed, and Line  
Feed commands also operate in the Execute Form mode. Remember that the  
EXECUTE Form command must be entered in UPPERCASE, and that a  
single line spacing (or a line containing overlay data) must separate an  
EXECUTE command from a NORMAL command.  
NOTE: Some systems pad the data stream with characters and spaces. If the  
IGP/PGL file on your system contains padded characters or spaces  
before the SFCC, this data must be ignored before the IGP/PGL can  
operate. The Ignore Sequence (IGON/IGPOFF) command,  
discussed on page 4–65, is provided for this purpose.  
Similarly, at times you may also need the IGP/PGL to ignore  
host–originated paper movement commands (carriage return, line  
feed, form feed, etc.) in lengthy data streams. Select Format  
(SFON/SFOFF) discussed on page 4–90 is provided for this  
purpose. In addition, the Quiet command, (page 4–84), can be used  
to pass data unchanged to the printer.  
Introduction  
1–11  
 
Table 1–3. Execute Form Mode Commands  
Command  
Mnemonic  
Description  
Page No.  
Compressed Print  
DENSITY  
Defines the horizontal print density in characters per  
inch (cpi).  
4–33  
Dynamic Alphanumeric  
Data  
AFn  
BFn  
Executes the dynamic alphanumeric data provided  
after the (cc) EXECUTE command.  
4–54  
4–55  
Dynamic Bar Code Data  
Executes the dynamic bar code data provided after the  
(cc)EXECUTE command.  
Expanded Print  
Font  
EXPAND  
FONT  
Expands fonts vertically and horizontally.  
4–60  
4–61  
Selects a specific typeface, bold, slant (italic) factor,  
and symbol set.  
Ignore Sequence  
On/Off  
IGON  
IGOFF  
Enables the IGP/PGL to ignore all characters after the  
Ignore Sequence On command is sent until the Ignore  
Sequence Off command is sent.  
4–65  
See Note on Page 1–11.  
Incremental Alphanumeric IAFn  
Dynamic Data  
Executes the incremental dynamic alphanumeric data  
provided after the (cc) EXECUTE command.  
4–57  
4–57  
Incremental Bar Code  
Dynamic Data  
IBFn  
Executes the incremental dynamic bar code data  
provided after the (cc)EXECUTE command.  
Line Spacing, Vertical  
LPI  
Defines the lines per inch (lpi) printing format.  
Selects one of the 32 multinational character sets.  
4–66  
Multinational  
Character Set  
ISET  
Chapter 7  
Normal Mode  
NORMAL  
PAPER  
Places the IGP/PGL in the Normal mode, where it does  
not change the data stream but awaits the SFCC  
followed by an IGP/PGL command.  
4–77  
4–79  
Paper  
Selects features such as paper cutter, print intensity,  
label sensor, page orientation (portrait/landscape), and  
print speed.  
Reset  
RESET  
Deletes all forms and logos from the IGP/PGL  
memory.  
4–85  
4–90  
Select Format  
On/Off  
SFON  
SFOFF  
Ignores all host–generated paper movement  
commands. See Note on Page 1–11.  
1–12  
Introduction  
 
Configuration Mode  
Selecting IGP/PGL options for running IGP/PGL files on your printer is  
referred to as IGP/PGL configuration. You can select IGP/PGL configuration  
parameters by sending commands from the host or by pressing keys on the  
control panel.  
Chapter 4 describes all the firmware commands.  
Chapter 2 shows the control panel menu and describes all of the  
configuration parameters. A list of the parameters is shown in Table 1–4.  
Table 1–4. IGP/PGL Configuration Mode Options  
NOTE:  
Parameters marked with an asterisk (*) indicate the factory default value.  
The printer must be off–line to enter the configuration structure.  
Option  
Parameter  
Value  
Comments  
AutoEject  
DISABLE *  
ENABLE  
If the last page of a job is only 1/2 full (the data does not fill  
the entire page), you can instruct the printer to eject the  
page or leave it in the printer. ENABLE causes the printer  
to eject the last page after the entire page has been  
processed and printed. DISABLE instructs the printer to  
eject the page only if you send a Page Eject command or  
when the printer receives the next print job.  
Auto Wrap  
DISABLE *  
ENABLE  
Controls automatic “wrapping” of text to the next line  
down when the text exceeds the right margin.  
DISABLE truncates text beyond the page margin until a  
CR or CR + LF is received. ENABLE automatically inserts  
a CR + LF after a full print line.  
If a proportional spaced font is used, this option is ignored  
and the printer does not wrap text.  
Define CR Code  
Define LF Code  
CR = CR *  
When CR = CR + LF, a line feed is automatically inserted  
after each CR received, otherwise data passes through  
unchanged.  
CR = CR + LF  
LF = LF *  
When LF = CR + LF, a CR is automatically inserted before  
each line feed is processed, otherwise data passes through  
unchanged.  
LF = CR + LF  
Introduction  
1–13  
 
Option  
Parameter  
Value  
Comments  
Ext Execute Copy  
DISABLE*  
ENABLE  
If DISABLED, dynamic data, overlay data, etc. are not  
allowed if the optional Form Count parameter is specified  
as part of the Execute command.  
If ENABLED, dynamic data, overlay data, etc. are allowed  
within a form in which the Form Count parameter is  
specified in the Execute command. In this case, the exact  
same form (with identical dynamic data, etc.) is printed for  
whatever the Form Count is. Also, each form is printed on  
a
separate page.  
Host Form Length  
Power On IGP/PGL  
Select SFCC  
DISABLE  
ENABLE*  
DISABLE sets the form length to the value set from the  
front panel. ENABLE sets the printer page size equal to the  
form length defined in the CREATE FORM mode.  
DISABLE  
ENABLE*  
DISABLE puts printer in QUIET mode at power–up,  
otherwise ENABLE or LISTEN mode is active at  
power–up.  
1 – 255 decimal  
126 *  
Select any ASCII character from Table 1–5 on page 1–16  
to set the binary pattern for the selected Special Function  
Control Character. Default is decimal 126 (~).  
Uppercase  
DISABLE*  
ENABLE  
If ENABLED, all incoming data is converted to uppercase.  
1–14  
Introduction  
 
Option  
Parameter  
Value  
Comments  
Select Font  
0 *  
0 = US ASCII  
11–23 = Undefined default to ASCII.  
1 = German  
2 = Swedish  
24–31 = User–defined symbol set  
from the USET command.  
1
2
3 = Danish  
4 = Norwegian  
5 = Finnish  
6 = English  
7 = Dutch  
3
4
5
6
7
8 = French  
9 = Spanish  
10 = Italian  
8
9
10  
Select LPI  
1 – 10  
Any integer value from 1 to 10. Default is 6.  
Skip Cmd Prefix  
DISABLE  
ENABLE*  
DISABLE prints text before a valid IGP/PGL command as  
if a line feed preceded the command’s SFCC. ENABLE  
ignores any text before a valid command.  
Upc Descenders  
DISABLE  
ENABLE*  
If ENABLED, human readable text for UPC and EAN bar  
codes is embedded within the bar code.  
If DISABLED, the text is printed below the bar code.  
Introduction  
1–15  
 
Table 1–5. ASCII Conversion Table  
Binary  
Pattern  
Binary  
Pattern  
Binary  
Pattern  
Binary  
Pattern  
1
1
1
1
ASCII  
Dec  
Hex  
ASCII  
Dec  
Hex  
ASCII  
Dec  
Hex  
ASCII  
Dec  
Hex  
7
7
7
7
NUL  
0
00 0000000  
01 0000001  
02 0000010  
03 0000011  
04 0000100  
05 0000101  
06 0000110  
07 0000111  
08 0001000  
09 0001001  
SP  
!
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
20 0100000  
21 0100001  
22 0100010  
23 0100011  
24 0100100  
25 0100101  
26 0100110  
27 0100111  
28 0101000  
29 0101001  
2A 0101010  
2B 0101011  
2C 0101100  
2D 0101101  
2E 0101110  
2F 0101111  
30 0110000  
31 0110001  
32 0110010  
33 0110011  
34 0110100  
35 0110101  
36 0110110  
37 0110111  
38 0111000  
39 0111001  
3A 0111010  
3B 0111011  
3C 0111100  
3D 0111101  
3E 0111110  
3F 0111111  
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
78  
79  
80  
81  
82  
83  
84  
85  
86  
87  
88  
89  
90  
91  
92  
93  
94  
95  
40 1000000  
41 1000001  
42 1000010  
43 1000011  
44 1000100  
45 1000101  
46 1000110  
47 1000111  
48 1001000  
49 1001001  
4A 1001010  
4B 1001011  
4C 1001100  
4D 1001101  
4E 1001110  
4F 1001111  
50 1010000  
51 1010001  
52 1010010  
53 1010011  
54 1010100  
55 1010101  
56 1010110  
57 1010111  
58 1011000  
59 1011001  
5A 1011010  
5B 1011011  
5C 1011100  
5D 1011101  
5E 1011110  
5F 1011111  
a
b
c
d
e
f
96  
97  
60 1100000  
61 1100001  
62 1100010  
63 1100011  
64 1100100  
65 1100101  
66 1100110  
67 1100111  
68 1101000  
69 1101001  
6A 1101010  
6B 1101011  
6C 1101100  
6D 1101101  
6E 1101110  
6F 1101111  
70 1110000  
71 1110001  
72 1110010  
73 1110011  
74 1110100  
75 1110101  
76 1110110  
77 1110111  
78 1111000  
79 1111001  
7A 1111010  
7B 1111011  
7C 1111100  
7D 1111101  
7E 1111110  
7F 1111111  
SOH  
STX  
ETX  
EOT  
ENQ  
ACK  
BEL  
BS  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
#
$
%
&
98  
99  
100  
101  
102  
103  
104  
105  
106  
107  
108  
109  
110  
111  
112  
113  
114  
115  
116  
117  
118  
119  
120  
121  
122  
123  
124  
125  
126  
127  
G
H
I
g
h
i
(
HT  
9
)
LF  
10 0A 0001010  
11 0B 0001011  
12 0C 0001100  
13 0D 0001101  
14 0E 0001110  
15 0F 0001111  
16 10 0010000  
17 11 0010001  
18 12 0010010  
19 13 0010011  
20 14 0010100  
21 15 0010101  
22 16 0010110  
23 17 0010111  
24 18 0011000  
25 19 0011001  
26 1A 0011010  
27 1B 0011011  
28 1C 0011100  
29 1D 0011101  
30 1E 0011110  
31 1F 0011111  
*
+
,
J
j
VT  
K
L
M
N
O
P
k
l
FF  
CR  
.
m
n
o
p
q
r
SO  
.
SI  
/
DLE  
DC1  
DC2  
DC3  
DC4  
NAK  
SYN  
ETB  
CAN  
EM  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
Q
R
S
s
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
|
SUB  
ESC  
FS  
;
<
=
>
?
\
GS  
]
}
~
RS  
^
US  
_
1–16  
Introduction  
 
Alphanumeric Data  
Based on the requirements of a specific application, you can use one of three  
methods to print alphanumeric data on a form: Fixed data, Overlay data, and  
Dynamic data. These methods are described in more detail in the  
“Commands” chapter.  
Fixed data prints on each form in the same “prepositioned” location,  
unless the location changes in the form definition. Company name,  
address, logo, and phone number are typical examples of alphanumeric  
data that can be “fixed” onto the form.  
Overlay data is variable alphanumeric data positioned on the page with  
line feeds and spaces to fit into exact locations. For example, specific  
data can be “overlayed” onto a blank form as if you were typing data  
into the appropriate blanks on a preprinted form. Customer names,  
addresses, and order numbers are examples of data overlayed onto a  
form.  
Dynamic data is variable data entered into specific locations on each  
form. Each time the form prints, a command enters new data in those  
locations. Customer names, addresses, or any type of variable  
alphanumeric or bar code data can be provided dynamically.  
Incremental Data  
The incremental data feature allows you to update alphanumeric and bar  
code data fields in an alphabetical or numeric manner automatically with just  
one set of data sent from the host computer.  
Alphanumeric and bar code incremental fields can be used with fixed (static)  
data input as part of the Create Form mode or with dynamic data supplied in  
the Execute Form mode.  
The incremental fields can be increased or decreased, repeated at specified  
intervals before updating, and reset to the starting value after a specified  
number of increments.  
Introduction  
1–17  
 
1–18  
Introduction  
 
2
Configuration  
Chapter Contents  
Configuring the IPG/PGL with the Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2  
The IGP/PGL Emulation Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3  
Define CR Code (Carriage Return) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4  
Define LF Code (Line Feed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4  
Autowrap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4  
Select SFCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4  
Select Font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–5  
Auto Eject . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–5  
Select LPI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–5  
Auto Uppercase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6  
Skip Command Prefix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6  
Power On IGP/PGL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6  
Extended Execute Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6  
UPC Descenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–7  
Host Form Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–7  
IGP100 Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–7  
2–1  
Configuration  
 
Configuring the IGP/PGL with the Control Panel  
Matching certain printer operational settings to those of the host computer is  
known as “printer configuration.” The settings, or configuration parameters,  
such as selecting the host interface, are adjusted according to the printer  
function key descriptions in your printer’s user manual. Configure the  
IGP/PGL in the same way you would configure the printer for other features.  
You can select IGP/PGL default parameters directly from the control panel  
as explained in this chapter, or by control codes as explained in the  
“Commands” chapter.  
The IGP/PGL parameters are described on page 2–4 and the following  
pages. Parameters marked with an asterisk (*) indicate the default value. The  
printer must be off–line to enter the configuration structure.  
Enter and exit the IGP/PGL configuration menu according to your printer  
user manual configuration procedures. Pressing an invalid key to enter a  
parameter value may move you to another level in the configuration or exit  
the configuration menu completely.  
IMPORTANT  
BEFORE you reconfigure the IGP/PGL, print a configuration sheet to  
see all of the current settings. Refer to your printer user manual.  
Configure the IGP/PGL according to your specific requirements. Please note  
the differences associated with the following options.  
Left Margin Sign. The Left Margin Sign option no longer exists in the  
IGP/PGL configuration menu. To establish a signed left margin and a  
top/bottom margin, access the option from the LP+ configuration menu.  
Overstrike Data. Thermal printing uses a bold font to emphasize  
overstrike data (e.g., data <carriage return> data <cr/lf> would  
overstrike “data” so that it would be bolded.)  
The IGP/PGL sub–menu is shown on the following page.  
2–2  
Configuration  
 
The IGP/PGL Emulation Submenu  
Emulation  
IGP/PGL  
Define CR  
Code  
Define LF  
Code  
Select  
SFCC  
Autowrap  
CR = CR*  
LF = LF*  
Disable*  
Enable  
1–255  
126*  
CR = CR + LF  
LF = CR + LF  
Select  
Font  
Auto  
Skip Cmd  
Prefix  
Power On  
IGP/PGL  
Autoeject  
Select LPI  
Uppercase  
Disble*  
Enable  
1–10  
6*  
Disable*  
Enable  
Enable*  
Disable  
Enable*  
Disable  
0–31  
0*  
Ext Execute  
Copy  
UPC  
Host Form  
Length  
IGP100  
Descenders  
Compatibilty  
Disable*  
Enable  
Enable*  
Disable  
Disable*  
Enable  
Disable*  
Enable  
Figure 2–1. The Configuration Menu  
2–3  
Configuration  
 
Define CR Code (Carriage Return)  
This parameter forces the printer to insert an automatic Line Feed code into  
the data stream whenever a Carriage Return code occurs. This is to be used  
only if the host computer does not send Line Feeds to the printer.  
CR = CR. The default. Does NOT perform a line feed. The next print  
position will be print position 1 of the current line.  
CR = CR + LF. Performs an automatic line feed. The next print  
position will be print position 1 of the next line.  
Define LF Code (Line Feed)  
This parameter forces the printer to insert an automatic Carriage Return code  
into the data stream whenever a Line Feed code occurs. This can be used in  
most installations, but it is required if the host computer does not send  
Carriage Returns to the printer.  
LF = LF. The default. Does not perform an automatic carriage return.  
The next print position will be the current print position of the next line.  
LF = CR + LF. Performs an automatic carriage return. The next print  
position will be print position 1 of the next line.  
Autowrap  
This parameter determines if text will wrap to the next line when the line of  
text exceeds the right margin.  
Disable. The default. Truncates the text beyond the right margin until a  
CR or CR+LF is received.  
Enable. Automatically inserts a CR+LF after a full print line.  
Select SFCC  
You can specify which decimal code (1–255) will be used as the Special  
Function Control Character (SFCC). The factory default setting is 126 (~).  
The SFCC denotes that the following data is an IGP/PGL command.  
2–4  
Configuration  
 
Select Font  
This parameter allows you to select a font for the IGP/PGL feature. The  
default is 0, which is U.S. ASCII. The following values are valid choices:  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
U.S. ASCII  
German  
Swedish  
Danish  
Norwegian  
Finnish  
English  
Dutch  
French  
Spanish  
Italian  
Values 11–23 are undefined and will default to 0. You can set values 24–31  
to specific fonts; refer to the USET command.  
Auto Eject  
If the last page of a job is not full, that is, the data does not fill the entire  
page, you can instruct the printer to eject the page or to stop and hold the  
page at the last print position.  
Enable. The printer ejects the last page after the entire job has been  
processed and printed.  
Disable. The default. The printer does not eject the last page unless you send  
a Page Eject command or until the printer receives another print job.  
Select LPI  
This is the number of lines to be printed per inch. For example, at 6 lpi there  
is 1/6–inch from the top of one print line to the top of the next print line.  
Default is 6 lpi.  
2–5  
Configuration  
 
Auto Uppercase  
This parameter enables the printer to print text in all uppercase.  
Disable. The default. The printer will print text in upper- and lowercase.  
Enable. The printer will print text in uppercase only.  
Skip Command Prefix  
This parameter determines if a data string before an IGP/PGL command will  
be ignored.  
Disable. The printer will print any data before an IGP/PGL command.  
Enable. The default. The printer ignores all text before an IGP/PGL  
command.  
Power On IGP/PGL  
You can set the IGP/PGL feature so that it is enabled or disabled when the  
printer is powered on.  
Disable. The IGP/PGL is disabled when the printer is powered on. (The  
IGP/PGL feature is initialized to the Quiet mode.)  
Enable. The default. The IGP/PGL is enabled when the printer is powered  
on. (The IGP/PGL feature is initialized in the Normal mode.)  
Extended Execute Copy  
Disable. The default. Dynamic data, overlay data, etc. are not allowed if the  
optional Form Count parameter (number of forms to print) is specified as  
part of the Execute command. (This setting is IGP100 compatible.)  
Enable. Dynamic data, overlay data, etc. are allowed within a form in which  
the Form Count parameter is specified in the Execute command. In this case,  
the exact same form (with identical dynamic data, etc.) is printed for  
whatever the Form Count is. However, incremental data is not incremented  
since the page that is printing is exactly the same. Also, each form is printed  
on a separate page.  
2–6  
Configuration  
 
UPC Descenders  
This parameter allows you to leave a gap for human readable data in the  
UPC/EAN bar codes.  
Disable. The IGP/PGL does not leave a gap if there is no human readable  
data.  
Enable. The default. The IGP/PGL leaves a gap, even if there is no human  
readable data.  
Host Form Length  
This parameter determines which page length setting (the one specified in  
the Create Form mode or the one set on the printer) will be used when you  
send an Execute (print) command.  
Enable. The page length set in the Create Form mode is used. This is the  
default.  
Disable. The page length set on the printer will be used.  
IGP100 Compatibility  
This parameter is used to make PGL compatible to the original IGP100 in  
cases such as exact positioning of text, etc.  
Disable. Does not change PGL behavior. This is the default value.  
Enable. Makes PGL behavior compatible to that of IGP100.  
2–7  
Configuration  
 
2–8  
Configuration  
 
3
PTX_Setup  
Chapter Contents  
PTX_Setup Command Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2  
PTX_Setup Command Parameters and Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–4  
DISK_IO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–4  
ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5  
PTX_Setup Command Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–6  
PTX_Setup  
3–1  
 
PTX_Setup Command Description  
Purpose  
Enables the host to control PSA printer resources common to all  
emulations.  
Mode  
All modes (Normal, Quiet, etc.)  
Format  
(cc) PTX_SETUP  
<category–> [<parameter;value:> ...<parameter;value:>|<parameter;value:>.  
:
:
<category–> [<parameter;value:> ...<parameter;value:>|<parameter;value:>.  
PTX_END  
(cc)  
The Special Function Control Character.  
This cc is NOT the PGL SFCC. It is the “setup” SFCC  
and is set under the Maint/Misc configuration menu.  
PTX_SETUP  
The trigger command. Must appear in capital letters.  
Once the trigger is detected, all unprintable characters  
and spaces (i.e., characters less than 21 hex) are  
ignored.  
<category – >  
This selects which category or type of command is  
being entered: CONFIG, DISK_IO, ENGINE,  
FORMAT or TEST_CHK. All categories must appear  
in capital letters and must be followed by a dash (–).  
<parameter;value:> Parameter and value pair for the current category. See  
the listing of categories, valid parameters and ranges of  
values beginning on page 3–4. The parameter and  
value must be separated by a semicolon (;) and must  
be terminated by either a colon (:) or a period (.).  
The colon signifies that more parameter/value pairs for  
the current category are to follow; therefore, more than  
one parameter/value pair may be given for the current  
category. The period denotes the end of parameter/  
value pairs for the given category.  
Parameter/value pairs must not exceed 25 characters  
with the semicolon and terminator included.  
3–2  
PTX_Setup  
 
PTX_END  
The end command for the PTX_SETUP. When the  
PTX_END command is detected, any unprintable  
characters following it will be ignored. Therefore, the  
next printable character from the host will be sent to  
the active emulation.  
Comments The PTX_Setup feature will only manage those options that are common  
between printer emulations. Each emulation is responsible for providing  
host commands to set emulation–specific options. If input data is invalid or  
causes an error, the PTX_Setup parsing is terminated and the next character  
is passed to the active emulation.  
PTX_Setup  
3–3  
 
PTX_Setup Command Parameters and Values  
The valid SETUP parameters and value ranges are listed below according to  
category.  
DISK_IO  
Valid parameter/values for performing disk–related functions are listed  
below. Filenames must follow the MS–DOS standard and be enclosed in  
double quotation marks; for example, “a:filename.dat”.  
An invalid filename will cause the PTX_SETUP function to exit and data  
will be passed directly to the active emulation.  
CAPTURE;“<filename>”  
Stores the host data sent to the printer external memory module under the  
given filename enclosed in double quotation marks before being given to the  
emulation.  
If the file previously existed, it is deleted and overwritten. Data capture is  
terminated when the CAPTURE setup command is sent with a blank file  
name (i.e., CAPTURE;“”. or CAPTURE;“”:).  
NOTE: File capturing begins after the PTX_END is encountered and stops  
when the next PTX–SETUP is received. Commands within  
PTX_SETUP cannot be captured. Also, if no suffix is given, the  
default of “.PTX” is assumed.  
RUNFILE;“<filename>”  
Reads the contents of the named file enclosed in double quotation marks and  
passes the data as input to the active emulation. If the file is not found, no  
action is taken.  
DRIVE;“<char>”  
Changes the drive used in capturing and running file data when the drive is  
not explicitly given by the user. The power–up default drive is drive A. Enter  
‘B’ to change the default to drive B.  
3–4  
PTX_Setup  
 
DEL;“<filename>”  
Deletes the given file enclosed in double quotation marks from the printer  
external memory. If the file is not found, no action is taken.  
FONT;“[drive]<font number>”  
Allows downloading of HP LaserJet II bitmap fonts into a memory module.  
The syntax is as follows:  
DISK_IO–FONT;“[Drive:]<font number>”  
<Font Data>  
FONT_END  
Note that when using the FONT command, it should be the only command  
on the line (i.e., multiple DISK_IO commands should not be used along  
with the FONT command on the same line). The <Font Data> follows  
immediately after the command.  
All data following the FONT command will be interpreted and stored as a  
font on the proper module. The font will be stored on the drive specified in  
the command, if it was included; otherwise, it will use the default drive. The  
font number can be in the range of 1–99. The same font number should be  
used when the font is activated (using the font command).  
ENGINE  
The following list contains the valid parameter/values for controlling the  
print engine and setting the Paper Control menu options. Some parameters or  
values are not available or do not apply to all engines. (Consult the engine  
manual for specific ENGINE options.)  
If a valid parameter is given but does not apply to the current engine, then it  
is ignored. If a valid value is outside the available range for the current  
engine, then the option will be set with the closest available value for that  
engine.  
ALM_WIDE;#  
Defines the Automatic Label Mapping (ALM) wide–web width in 1/1000ths  
of an inch increments from 0–65535.  
PTX_Setup  
3–5  
 
ALM_NARROW;#  
Defines the Automatic Label Mapping narrow–web width in  
1/1000ths–of–an–inch increments from 0–65535.  
ALM_ENABLE;<value>  
Enables or disables the ALM. The value ‘N’ or ’W’ enables the ALM. A  
“D” disables the ALM. An ‘N’ defines a page as “narrow.” A ‘W’ defines a  
page as “wide.”  
IMAGE_SHFT_H;#  
Defines the horizontal image shift in 1/1000ths–of–an–inch increments from  
(–1000)–(1000).  
IMAGE_SHFT_V;#  
Defines the vertical image shift in 1/1000ths–of–an–inch increments from  
(–1000)–(1000).  
LENGTH;#  
Defines the page length in 1/1000ths–of–an–inch increments. The range of  
values is dependent upon the printer. (Refer to the Setup Guide for your  
printer.)  
REWIND;#  
Enables or disables the rewind function. A zero value disables rewind and a  
‘1’ value enables the rewinder.  
WIDTH;#  
Defines the page width in 1/1000ths–of–an–inch increments. The range of  
values is dependent upon the printer. (See the printer manual.)  
PTX_Setup Command Example  
!PTX_SETUP  
ENGINE–LENGTH;11000:WIDTH;8500.  
PTX_END  
This example sets page dimensions to 8.5” wide by 11” long.  
3–6  
PTX_Setup  
 
4
Commands  
Chapter Contents  
IGP/PGL Command Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3  
Special Function Control Character (SFCC) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3  
Semicolon (;) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3  
Uppercase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3  
Inline Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3  
Line Terminator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4  
Printable Character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4  
Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5  
Command Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5  
Form Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5  
Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6  
Numeric Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6  
Comments in Command Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6  
Storing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6  
Uncompressed and Packed Bits Compression . . . . . . . . . . . 4–7  
Character Position.Dot Position (CP.DP) Format . . . . . . . . . 4–7  
Data Fields for Alphanumeric and Incremental Data . . . . . . . . . 4–9  
Fixed Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–9  
Overlay Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–9  
Dynamic Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–9  
Incremental Data Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–10  
Commands  
4–1  
 
Dark Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–10  
Thermal Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–10  
Line-Matrix Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–10  
Individual Command Descriptions (Alphabetical) . . . . . . . . . . . 4–12  
4–2  
Commands  
 
IGP/PGL Command Standards  
IGP/PGL commands have many options and a specific format that you must  
follow to obtain the desired results. Certain elements are standard for all  
IGP/PGL commands. These command standards are described in the  
following sections. Familiarize yourself with the meaning and use of these  
standards before operating the IGP/PGL.  
Special Function Control Character (SFCC)  
The SFCC identifies a command directed to the IGP/PGL to enable a specific  
IGP/PGL function. Based on the host computer interface requirements,  
various characters can be selected as the SFCC, such as the hat (^) or a tilde  
(~). Use caution and be certain it is compatible with your host system, if you  
use a nonprintable character as your SFCC. The SFCC must be placed before  
a command or data is entered. The examples in this manual use the tilde as  
the SFCC; always substitute the actual SFCC required by your system  
wherever the tilde is shown. In the general command formats, the SFCC is  
represented by (cc).  
You can select the SFCC using the CONFIG command (page 4–34) or the  
control panel (page 2–4).  
Semicolon (;)  
Each parameter (alpha data, options, etc) on the command line is separated  
by a semicolon. Blank spaces between the semicolon and the next parameter  
are not allowed. A missing or misplaced semicolon causes an error message.  
Uppercase  
The IGP/PGL is “case sensitive.” ALL commands must be entered in  
uppercase.  
Inline Commands  
The SFCC, usually a “~”, was required to be the first character on a new line.  
It may now appear anywhere on the command line.  
Commands  
4–3  
 
There is a configuration option that determines whether any data preceding a  
command is printed or ignored.  
All PGL commands begin with the Special Function Control Character  
(SFCC). When the command is not followed by a valid line terminator, it  
must also end with the SFCC. Any illegal command or non–terminated  
command will print as text.  
These features, when used in combination with the new dynamic data rule,  
are useful for those whose systems count the number of lines printed and  
automatically issue a form feed. Now, the line count can be maintained by  
combining overlay data and commands in a single print line. For example:  
Normal text ~FONT;BOLD ON~Bold text~FONT;BOLD OFF;SLANT  
1~Slanted text~EXPAND;2:2~~FONT;SLANT 0~ Enlarged upright text  
would yield:  
Normal text Bold text Slanted text  
Enlarged  
Upright Text  
Line Terminator  
Each command line must be terminated by a line feed (or a carriage return  
with a line feed), or a paper motion command. When an inline command is  
not followed by a valid line terminator, it must also end with the SFCC. The  
command line will not be accepted if not properly terminated. Refer to your  
system operator’s manual for your system keyboard and your printer  
configuration codes to determine which key(s) (such as ENTER, LINE  
FEED, RETURN, etc.) perform a line feed, carriage return with line feed, or  
form feed function.  
Printable Character  
To print, alphanumeric and bar code data must be enclosed by a printable  
character (a delimiter). This delimiter is represented by (D) in the command  
format. In this manual, an asterisk (*) is used in most examples as the  
printable character. (The parentheses are not entered.) Any printable  
character can be used as this delimiter except a slash (/) or the SFCC.  
4–4  
Commands  
 
The same printable character must be used at both the beginning and end of  
the text to be printed and cannot be used within the text.  
Spaces  
Spaces are used in the general command formats to visually separate  
individual command parameters. Supply the appropriate information for the  
command parameter, but do not enter the spaces in the command sequence;  
they are shown simply as a visual aid to illustrate where one command  
parameter ends and another begins.  
Command Parameters  
Most commands include a number of parameters. Some are optional, and  
some are required. Each parameter must be separated by a semicolon (;)  
unless noted otherwise. Throughout this manual, actual commands required  
for input are shown exactly as they must be entered and all parameters  
associated with that command are shown in italics. Optional parameters are  
enclosed in brackets [ ], but do not enter the brackets.  
Parentheses indicate variable data. You have a choice of what to enter, but  
you must enter something. Do not enter the parentheses themselves.  
Form Name  
You must use alphanumeric characters to identify the document (form or  
logo) you are creating (a maximum of 12 alphanumeric characters). The  
Form Name is also used to identify the form during the Execute Form mode.  
The valid Form Name characters are listed below and also apply to Logo  
Name. The SFCC can also be used in the Form Name. No spaces are allowed  
between any of the Form Name characters.  
A to Z (upper and lowercase)  
0 to 9  
Left and right parentheses ( )  
Tilde ~  
Dollar sign $  
Percent sign %  
Dash –  
Single quotes ‘ ’  
Exclamation point !  
Pound sign #  
At sign @  
Ampersand &  
Left and right braces { }  
Commands  
4–5  
 
Prompt  
The prompt is the symbol (e.g., a dollar sign, period or greater than symbol)  
used to indicate that the host computer is ready for data input. In this manual,  
the prompt is shown as a period (.).  
Numeric Values  
In this manual, a lowercase n in the command represents a numeric value. If  
a command parameter includes a lowercase n, it must be substituted with an  
appropriate numeric value. If the lowercase n is part of an optional parameter  
and the option is not selected, a value for n is not required.  
Comments in Command Lines  
To aid in preparation or maintenance of a form or logo, comments can be  
added to many command lines. Comments must be preceded by a slash (/).  
However, do not use the /comment feature on lines containing an SFCC (i.e.,  
CREATE, NORMAL, EXECUTE, etc.). Throughout this manual, comments  
are provided in parenthesis beside most command lines for better  
understanding of IGP/PGL operation but should not be included in your  
IGP/PGL files.  
Storing Data  
To send data to the IGP/PGL, use a host system command, such as PRINT.  
(Entering data through the keyboard does not store data in nonvolatile  
IGP/PGL memory.) Once stored in memory, the data remains until deleted,  
the IGP/PGL is reset with RESET command, or until the printer is turned off.  
IGP/PGL files can be permanently stored to, deleted from, and retrieved  
from the printer external memory modules by ending CREATE, CREATE  
LOGO, DELETE FORM, DELETE LOGO, EXECUTE, and DIRECTORY  
commands with ;DISK.  
For example, the following command creates a form named ORDER and  
stores it in the IGP/PGL printer external memory.  
(cc)CREATE;ORDER;DISK  
4–6  
Commands  
 
NOTE: Executing a form or calling a logo will access the default printer  
memory module automatically if the object is not found in memory.  
Uncompressed and Packed Bits Compression  
PGL logos support uncompressed and packed bits compression methods.  
CCITT and LZR (used for color) compression methods are not supported.  
Refer to your application’s documentation about TIFF files.  
Character Position.Dot Position (CP.DP) Format  
The CP.DP format is a special parameter available with the IGP/PGL  
commands. CP.DP format allows two elements plotted at nearly the same  
character location to be offset to eliminate overlapping. Specifying starting  
and ending rows and columns is its most frequent use.  
Each character location is a cell. Each cell is a grid 12 dot rows high by 6 dot  
columns wide (printing at 6 lpi and 10 cpi). The CP.DP format allows a  
character cell position (CP) and a specific dot position (DP) within the cell to  
be identified as shown in Figure 4–1. The DP portion of the CP.DP format  
specifies a location down (in reference to rows) and to the right (in reference  
to columns) within the character cell position.  
For example, refer to Figure 4–1. Suppose a line runs along character  
position column 13 (CP = 13). At the same time, an alphanumeric string  
must begin in column 13. With CP.DP format, the alphanumeric string can be  
offset 2 dot positions (DP = 2) in column 13 to avoid overlap. Specify 13.2  
(CP = 13, DP= .2) for the starting column of the alphanumeric string.  
Similarly, to place a horizontal line 8 dot rows beneath another horizontal  
line in character row position 11, specify row 11 for one line and row 11.8  
for the other line.  
Commands  
4–7  
 
12.5 13.1 13.3 13.5 14.1  
12.4 13.0 13.2 13.4 14.0  
11.0 12.0 13.0 14.0 15.0  
10.9  
10.10  
10.11  
11.0  
11.1  
11.2  
11.3  
11.4  
11.5  
11.6  
10.0  
11.0  
12.0  
13.0  
11.7  
11.8  
11.9  
11.10  
11.11  
12.0  
Figure 4–1. CP.DP Format Example  
4–8  
Commands  
 
Data Fields for Alphanumeric and Incremental Data  
Based upon the requirements of a specific application, three methods are  
used to print alphanumeric data on the form: fixed (or prepositioned) data,  
overlay data, and dynamic data.  
Fixed Data  
Fixed data is entered during the Create Form mode as part of the form  
definition. It appears as prepositioned information similar to other form  
elements. The fixed data is printed on each form in the same location and can  
only be changed by changing the form definition. Your company’s name,  
address, logo, or phone number are typical examples of alphanumeric data  
that can be fixed onto the form.  
Overlay Data  
Overlay data is variable alphanumeric data entered during the Execute Form  
mode by positioning the information with line feeds and spaces into an exact  
location. In general, a page of data is overlayed onto a form similar to typing  
data in the appropriate blanks of a preprinted form. Each page of overlay data  
is separated by form feeds to correspond to each form printed. Customer  
names, addresses, and order numbers are examples of variable data that can  
be overlayed onto the form.  
Dynamic Data  
Dynamic data is variable data entered by command during the Execute Form  
mode. The dynamic data is entered into a location previously defined in the  
Create Form mode. Up to 255 locations can be identified during the Create  
Form mode as part of the form definition.  
A command during the Execute Form mode enters new data in the identified  
location(s) each time the form prints. Dynamic data is the most efficient  
method of supplying variable data to the form. Again, customer names,  
addresses, or any type of variable alphanumeric or bar code data can be  
provided dynamically.  
Commands  
4–9  
 
Incremental Data Fields  
The incremental data fields feature allows alphanumeric (and bar code) data  
fields to automatically update numerically or alphabetically with just one set  
of data sent from the host computer. A maximum of 65,535 forms can print  
with incremental fields automatically updated.  
Alphanumeric incremental fields can be used with fixed (static) data input as  
part of the Create Form mode or with dynamic data supplied in the Execute  
Form mode. Incremental data fields cannot be used with Overlay data.  
Dark Printing  
A DARK parameter, available in the Alpha, Reverse, and Bar Code  
commands, is a double–strike feature which produces bolder, darker text,  
denser black backgrounds for reverse print, and extra–dark, more readable  
bar codes. The application of the dark feature differs between line-matrix and  
thermal printers, as described in the following paragraphs.  
Thermal Printers  
Reverse and Bar Code commands automatically print in the DARK mode in  
thermal printers; therefore, a DARK parameter in the command line is  
ignored. However, a DARK parameter used with alphanumeric text in the  
ALPHA command will print using a bold font. In any event, print speed is  
not reduced when using the DARK parameter with thermal printers.  
Line-Matrix Printers  
The extra darkness provided by the DARK parameter improves the Print  
Contrast Ratio (PCR) and effectively extends the life of the ribbon. For bar  
codes, the PCR describes the difference in light reflection between the bars  
and spaces as a measurement of light/dark contrast in order to judge when a  
printed bar code will not be dark enough to be read with accuracy by a  
scanner.  
The extra dots used to produce the darker bar code do not change the overall  
width of the wide bars. Figure 4–2 illustrates how the DARK parameter adds  
two extra dot columns to wide bar code bars without increasing bar width.  
4–10  
Commands  
 
Because of the second hammer bank stroke required to plot the extra  
columns of dots, print speed may be reduced up to half when the DARK  
parameter is used with Bar Code commands. However, this decreased print  
speed should be weighed against the significant increase in bar code PCR  
and extended ribbon life.  
ADDED COLUMNS OF DOTS  
NORMAL MODE  
DARK MODE  
Figure 4–2. Dark Printing  
NOTE: Depending on the printer used, the printed appearance and location  
of your print samples may vary from to those shown in this manual.  
The position of your print samples may also vary compared to these  
examples, depending on the initial print position.  
Commands  
4–11  
 
Alphanumerics  
Purpose  
Defines and positions alphanumeric data on a form as a “preprinted” static  
data field or as a dynamic data field.  
Mode  
CREATE  
Format  
ALPHA  
[R;] [E;] [Cn;] [AFn;L;] [DIR;] [UC;] [POINT;] SR; SC; VE; HE;  
(D)text(D) STOP  
ALPHA  
The Alphanumeric command; enter ALPHA.  
R
The optional reverse printing (white on black)  
parameter. Enter R to specify a black background.  
NOTE:  
The D parameter, used in earlier line-matrix IGP/PGL versions, is ignored  
in thermal IGP/PGL. In addition, the L parameter, also used in earlier  
IGP/PGL versions to specify a long reverse field for descending characters  
in dynamic alphanumeric data, is provided automatically in this IGP/PGL.  
The IGP/PGL will ignore these parameters if found in a command line.  
E
The optional elongated character parameter. Enter E to  
specify elongated character printing. Elongated  
characters are double height and single width. If used,  
the VE and HE parameters must be set to 0, or an error  
message will result. Elongated character printing is  
also available with rotated alphanumerics.  
Cn  
The optional horizontal compression parameter. Enter  
C. Then enter n = 10-30 to specify the number of  
horizontal characters per inch (cpi). 10 cpi is the  
default value. 10A = 10 cpi OCR–A. 10B = 10 cpi  
OCR–B. If used, the VE and HE parameters must be  
set to 0, or an error message will result.  
4–12  
Commands  
 
AFn;L  
The optional dynamic data field parameters for  
identifying the alphanumeric string location on a form  
and for designating the length of the alphanumeric  
string. If these parameters are used, the actual text  
cannot be entered during the Create Form mode; it  
must be entered dynamically during the Execute Form  
mode. Dynamically entering data during the Execute  
Form mode permits changes to the alphanumeric text  
without redefining or re–creating the form. To use this  
field, perform the following steps:  
a. Enter AF.  
b. Replace n with a number ranging from 1 to 255  
to identify the alphanumeric string location on  
the form. The SR and SC parameters are used to  
specify the exact location of the alphanumeric  
field identified by n.  
c. Replace L with a number equal to the number of  
characters in the dynamic alphanumeric string  
ranging from 1 to 255.  
d. Dynamically enter the alphanumeric string itself  
in the Execute Form mode. The length of the  
alphanumeric string must be equal to or less than  
the value assigned to the length (L) parameter.  
Refer to “Execute Form: Dynamic  
Alphanumeric Data” on page 4–54.  
e. If the dynamic data field is used, do not enter the  
ASCII TEXT parameter.  
DIR  
Optional parameter for rotating a character string. Use  
the following codes to indicate the direction of  
character rotation:  
a. Enter CW for 90 degree clockwise rotation.  
b. Enter CCW for 90 degree counterclockwise  
rotation.  
c. Enter INV for inverted characters (180 degree  
rotation).  
Commands  
4–13  
 
The default orientation prints character strings in the  
standard horizontal format.  
NOTE:  
Alpha rotation parameters (CW, CCW, INV) require more memory to  
implement than the default orientation. Thus, characters selected for  
rotation may appear in the default orientation. Selecting a smaller font will  
correct the problem.  
UC  
Enter UC to specify uppercase–only characters. When  
uppercase–only is specified, all lowercase alpha  
character codes are converted automatically to  
uppercase. Consequently, do not specify  
uppercase–only characters if lowercase characters are  
required.  
POINT  
Optional parameter that changes the units for the  
vertical and horizontal expansion values. When the  
point parameter is present the VE value defines the  
font height in 1/72 of an inch (i.e. points). If the HE  
value is non–zero, it defines the character width in 1/72  
of an inch, otherwise the character width is the  
standard width for the chosen height. Cannot be used  
with elongated (E) and compressed (Cn) parameters.  
SR  
SC  
VE  
Defines the starting row of the alphanumeric data.  
Enter a value ranging from row 1 through one less than  
the length of the form. Character row or dot row is  
specified based on the Scale command (page 4–88), or  
use the CP.DP format (page 4–7).  
Defines the starting column of the alphanumeric data.  
Enter a value ranging from column 1 through one less  
than the width of the form. Character column or dot  
column is specified based on the Scale command (page  
4–88), or use the CP.DP format (page 4–7).  
Defines the vertical expansion factor to enlarge  
characters vertically. Enter a value between 0 and 139.  
Zero specifies the standard font (no expansion). A VE  
value must be entered. Elongated (E) and compressed  
(Cn) characters cannot be used with a vertical  
expansion other than zero.  
4–14  
Commands  
 
HE  
(D)  
Defines the horizontal expansion factor to enlarge  
characters horizontally. Enter a value between 0 and  
139. Zero specifies the standard font (no expansion).  
An HE value must be entered. Elongated (E) and  
compressed (Cn) characters cannot be used with a  
horizontal expansion other than zero.  
The printable character (quotation marks for example)  
identifying the start and finish of the alphanumeric  
string. Enter any printable character other than a slash  
(/), the SFCC, or a character used within the  
alphanumeric string itself. You must use the same  
character at both ends of the alphanumeric string, but it  
will not print with the data.  
text  
The group of ASCII characters (the alphanumeric  
string) to print. Enter any of the standard ASCII  
printable characters (except the character used to  
delimit the string in the D parameter). The data appears  
as “prepositioned” information on the form beginning  
at the location specified by SR and SC. This is the  
“fixed” or static alphanumeric data; once defined on  
the form, it is changed only by redefining the form  
using the Alphanumerics command.  
STOP  
Stop indicates the end of the Alphanumeric command;  
enter STOP, and the IGP/PGL will wait for a new  
command. If not entered, the IGP/PGL will wait for  
another set of Alphanumeric command parameters.  
Comments As dynamic data, the location of the alphanumeric field is established in the  
Create Form mode and the actual alphanumeric data is continuously  
redefined before placement on the form in the Execute Form mode. You  
can also rotate and reverse print the alphanumeric string using this  
command.  
Example  
The following program and example in Figure 4–3 illustrates the  
Alphanumeric command capabilities. To illustrate positioning, starting row  
and column are indicated on the example but do not necessarily reflect  
actual location on the page.  
Commands  
4–15  
 
Notice the same starting row is used for all “EXAMPLE” characters, and  
they are all aligned on the same baseline (or bottom), regardless of  
expanded or compressed parameters. The string rotates around the point of  
intersection of the starting row and columns shown by the “pinwheel” E. A  
rotated 10 cpi character establishes the baseline for all character sizes.  
ALPHA  
36;37;4;4;*E*  
36;41;2;3;*X*  
36;44;2;2;*A*  
36;46;1;1;*M*  
(Single–size character, expanded font)  
C13;36;47;0;0;*P*  
C15;36;48;0;0;*L*  
C17;36;49;0;0;*E*  
CW;36;60;2;2;*CLOCK*  
CW;42;60;4;4;*WISE*  
CCW;58;26;2;3;*COUNTER*  
CCW;45.5;26;2;2;*CLOCK*  
CCW;39.2;26;1;1;*WISE*  
INV;54.5;58;0;0;*INVERTED*  
R;INV;54.5;49;0;0;*REVERSE PRINT*  
45;48;0;0;*E*  
CW;UC;45;48;0;0;*e*  
CCW;45;48;0;0;*E*  
INV;45;48;0;0;*E*  
STOP  
(Lowercase converted to uppercase)  
4–16  
Commands  
 
ROW 39.2  
MN 60  
ROW 58  
COLUMN 26  
Figure 4–3. Alphanumeric Example  
Commands  
4–17  
 
Alphanumerics, Incremental Fields  
Purpose  
The incremental fields feature updates alphanumeric (and bar code) data  
fields in a numeric or alphabetical manner automatically using just one set  
of data sent from the host computer. Incremental alphanumeric data fields  
can be applied to fixed (static) data (page 4–22), or dynamic data (page  
4–25).  
Mode  
CREATE (for fixed data) or EXECUTE (for dynamic data)  
NOTE:  
Throughout the discussion of incremental fields, the term “increment” or  
“incremental” means the field is automatically updated by a specified  
amount (or increment). The field can actually be increased/decreased in  
specified increments/decrements within the command.  
Comments Incremental fields can increase or decrease, repeat at specified intervals  
before updating, and reset to the starting value after a specified number of  
increments. A maximum of 65,535 fields can print.  
Using Incremental Alphanumeric Data  
The IGP/PGL internally counts incremental static (fixed) alphanumeric  
fields. A maximum of 255 incremental fixed alphanumeric fields are allowed  
per form.  
Incrementing is controlled with the STEPMASK and STARTDATA  
command parameters as described in Table 4–1. The parameters are part of  
the Incremental Alphanumeric Fixed Data command or part of the Execute  
command when using incremental alphanumeric dynamic data.  
The STEPMASK parameter performs the following three functions:  
1. It defines the increment amount (step);  
2. It defines the number of characters allowed in the data field  
(STARTDATA); and  
3. It provides a “mask” to link or unlink subfields of the data to be  
incremented independently. The data provided in the STEPMASK field  
combined with the data in the STARTDATA field determine the result of  
these functions.  
4–18  
Commands  
 
The increment amount is defined by the numeric value of the STEPMASK  
data. For example, a STEPMASK value of 1 increments the STARTDATA  
by 1; a STEPMASK value of 2 increments the STARTDATA by 2.  
The maximum number of characters allowed in the STARTDATA field is  
defined by the number of characters in the STEPMASK field; the  
STARTDATA field cannot contain more characters than used in the  
STEPMASK field.  
Linked and unlinked masking of subfields within the STARTDATA is  
defined by the L value in the STEPMASK field. L indicates linked but  
non–incremental data in the corresponding position of the STARTDATA  
field; any alpha character other than L in the STEPMASK field indicates a  
non–incremental, non–linked STARTDATA subfield.  
Table 4–1. Increment Alphanumeric  
STEPMASK  
START DATA  
A – Z  
Character Type and Function  
0 – 9  
Alpha characters incremented by amount  
in STEPMASK field  
0 – 9  
0 – 9  
0 – 9  
Numeric characters incremented by  
amount in STEPMASK field  
Space  
Same character type as character in the  
next right adjacent, linked increment posi-  
tion. Character type will be numeric if in  
least significant position.  
0 – 9  
Not A – Z or 0 – 9  
Any  
Error  
Not 0 – 9 or L  
Non–incrementing alphanumeric  
character  
L
Any  
Linked, non–incrementing alphanumeric  
character  
The examples on the following pages illustrate incremental alphanumeric  
data fields. All cases in the examples use a repeat count parameter value of 1  
and a reset count parameter value of 0. The three vertical dots illustrate the  
natural progression for each column and unit of data based on the  
incremental count and its impact on linked and unlinked data fields.  
Commands  
4–19  
 
Description  
Value  
STARTDATA:  
STEPMASK:  
ABC123  
000001  
Linked subfields: ABC and 123  
RPT = 1  
RST = 0  
Printed Results:  
ABC123  
ABC124  
......  
......  
......  
ABC999  
ABD000  
......  
......  
......  
ZZZ999  
AAA000  
Description  
Value  
STARTDATA:  
STEPMASK:  
1ABC123  
0LLL001  
T
wo separate but linked numeric  
subfields: 1 and 123, while  
fixed data ABC is nonincrementing  
RPT = 1  
RST = 0  
Printed Results:  
1ABC123  
1ABC124  
. ...  
. ...  
. ...  
1ABC999  
2ABC000  
Description  
Value  
STARTDATA:  
STEPMASK:  
ABC123  
001XX1  
T
wo separate unlinked  
subfields: ABC and 3,  
while fixed data 1 and 2 is  
nonincrementing  
RPT = 1  
Printed Results:  
ABC123  
RST = 0  
ABD124  
. .  
. .  
. .  
ABI129  
ABJ120  
4–20  
Commands  
 
Description  
Value  
STARTDATA:  
STEPMASK:  
___1  
0001  
Single numeric field with  
leading spaces (_)  
RPT = 1  
RST = 0  
Printed Results:  
___1  
___2  
....  
....  
....  
__10  
Description  
Value  
STARTDATA:  
STEPMASK:  
_AA98  
0LL01  
T
wo separate but linked numeric  
subfields: AA and 98, with leading  
space (_); fixed data AA is  
nonincrementing  
RPT = 1  
RST = 0  
Printed Results:  
_AA98  
. .  
. .  
. .  
1AA00  
Description  
Value  
STARTDATA:  
STEPMASK:  
_42AR  
0LL01  
Two separate but linked alpha  
subfields: A and R, with leading  
space (_); fixed data 42 is  
nonincrementing  
RPT = 1  
Printed Results:  
_42AR  
RST = 0  
_42AS  
. ..  
. ..  
. ..  
_42ZZ  
A42AA  
Description  
Value  
STARTDATA:  
STEPMASK:  
9AA02  
Single numeric field decremented  
by 1, while fixed data 9 and AA  
are nonincrementing  
–XXX01  
RPT = 1  
RST = 0  
STEP = –1  
Printed Results:  
9AA02  
9AA01  
9AA00  
9AA99  
..  
..  
9AA03  
Commands  
4–21  
 
Alphanumerics, Incremental: Fixed Data Fields  
Purpose  
Mode  
To automatically increment/decrement fixed alphanumeric data fields.  
CREATE  
NOTE:  
In the command format below, incremental alphanumeric command  
parameters are shown in boldface type; standard alphanumeric command  
parameters and optional nonincremental parameters are shown in italics.  
Due to space constraints, the command parameters are separated into two  
lines. During actual IGP/PGL input, DO NOT separate command  
parameters.  
Format  
ALPHA  
[R;] [E;] [Cn;] I; [DIR;] [UC;] SR; SC; VE; HE;[idir] STEPMASK;  
[RPTn;] [RSTn;] (D)STARTDATA(D)  
STOP  
I
Identifies this alphanumeric command as an  
Incremental Alphanumeric command; enter I.  
idir  
The optional increment direction parameter to specify  
an increment (add) or decrement (subtract) to the data.  
Enter a plus sign (+) or leave the field blank to  
increment (the default). Enter a minus sign () to  
decrement.  
STEPMASK  
Defines the increment amount (step), the number of  
character positions in the data field, and provides a  
mask to control the increment function on specific  
parts of the data. Enter STEPMASK, and enter the  
appropriate value. Refer to Table 4–1 on page 4–19 for  
complete information on STEPMASK parameter  
values.  
RPTn  
The optional incremental repeat count parameter to  
specify the number of times a particular field value is  
repeated before it is incremented. A repeated field  
value is useful when printing multiple rows/columns of  
identical labels before increasing to the next value.  
4–22  
Commands  
 
To use the repeat count parameter, enter RPT and  
replace n with a numeric value ranging from 1 to  
65,535 to specify the repeat count. The default repeat  
count parameter is 1, which will increment the field  
value each time it prints.  
RSTn  
The optional incremental reset count parameter to  
specify the number of times an incremented field is  
printed (on one or more forms) before it is reset to the  
starting value. A reset count is useful when printing a  
hierarchy of fields where a low–level field generates a  
sequence of numbers, is reset, and the next higher field  
level is incremented (such as in a unit/box/carton  
application).  
To use the reset count parameter, enter RST and  
replace n with a number ranging from 1 to 65,535 to  
specify the reset count. The default reset count value  
is 0.  
STARTDATA  
Defines the starting value of the incrementing field.  
Enter STARTDATA and the appropriate value. Refer  
to “Using Incremental Alphanumeric Data” on page  
4–18 for complete information on STARTDATA and  
STEPMASK parameter values.  
The maximum amount of STARTDATA characters  
must be equal to or less than the number of characters  
in the STEPMASK field. If the number of data  
characters is less than the number used in  
STEPMASK, the data will print right justified with  
preceding spaces.  
Characters allowed for incrementing fields  
(STEPMASK values of 0 – 9) are numeric 0 – 9 and  
alpha A – Z (uppercase only). Any printable character  
is allowed in nonincrementing fields (STEPMASK  
values not 0 – 9).The STARTDATA must be enclosed  
within standard printable character delimiters just as a  
standard alphanumeric data field is enclosed within  
delimiters.  
Commands  
4–23  
 
Comments The Incremental Alphanumeric Fixed Data Fields command is a revised  
version of the standard IGP/PGL alphanumeric command, but it does not  
replace the standard alphanumeric command.  
~CREATE;TEST;288  
VDUP;3;6  
ALPHA  
(Enters Create Form mode)  
(Repeat alpha string)  
(Alpha command)  
I;6;5;4;4;–00001;*12345*  
STOP  
(Ends Alpha command)  
VDUP;OFF  
END  
~EXECUTE;TEST  
(Terminates Create Form mode)  
(Prints form)  
~NORMAL  
4–24  
Commands  
 
Alphanumerics, Incremental: Dynamic Data Fields  
Purpose  
Automatically increments/decrements dynamic alphanumeric data fields.  
Specifies the location and size of the incremental dynamic data field during  
the Create Form mode; STEPMASK and STARTDATA parameters are  
supplied in the Execute command during the Execute Form mode.  
Mode  
CREATE  
NOTE:  
In the command format below, incremental alphanumeric command  
parameters are shown in boldface type; standard alphanumeric command  
parameters and optional nonincremental parameters are shown in italics.  
Format  
ALPHA  
[R;] [E;] [Cn;] IAFn;L; [DIR;] [UC;] SR; SC; VE; HE STOP  
IAFn;L  
Identifies this alphanumeric command as an  
Incremental Alphanumeric Dynamic Data Field  
command. The command parameter string identifies  
the incremental dynamic data field location on the  
form and defines the length of the alphanumeric data.  
If these parameters are used, the STEPMASK and  
STARTDATA parameters cannot be entered in the  
Create Form mode; they are entered dynamically  
during the Execute Forms mode. To use the  
incremental dynamic data field, perform the following  
steps:  
a. Enter IAF to specify an incremental  
alphanumeric dynamic data field.  
b. Replace n with a number ranging from 1 to 255  
to identify the alphanumeric string location on  
the form. The standard alphanumeric SR and SC  
command parameters specify the exact location  
of the field identified by n.  
Commands  
4–25  
 
c. Replace L with a number equal to the number of  
characters in the dynamic alphanumeric string  
(STARTDATA) ranging from 1 to 255.  
d. Dynamically enter the STEPMASK and  
STARTDATA parameters in the Execute Form  
mode. The length of the data must be equal to or  
less than the value assigned to the length (L)  
parameter. Refer to “Execute Form: Incremental  
Dynamic Data” on page 4–56 for more  
information.  
Comments The Incremental Alphanumeric Dynamic Data Fields command is a  
variation of the standard IGP/PGL Alphanumeric command, but does not  
replace the standard alphanumeric command.  
As with standard dynamic data fields, incremental dynamic data fields  
allow the starting data to be changed without changing the form definition  
program. Increment parameters can also change with each new job without  
changing the form definition program.  
Duplicating Incremental Alphanumeric Fields – Incremental  
alphanumeric fixed and dynamic data fields are duplicated horizontally  
using the HDUP command and vertically using the standard VDUP  
command. Duplicated incremental fields increment in left–to–right,  
top–to–bottom order. The following examples illustrate the results of  
duplicated incremental fields.  
4–26  
Commands  
 
Description  
Value  
STARTDATA:  
STEPMASK:  
01  
01  
Single numeric field (01)  
RPT = 1  
RST = 0  
HDUP = 3  
VDUP = 2  
Printed Results:  
01 02 03  
04 05 06  
Page #1:  
Page #2:  
07 08 09  
10 11 12  
Field A  
Unlinked subfields, alpha (A),  
numeric (01)  
RPT = 3  
STARTDATA:  
STEPMASK:  
A01  
X01  
RST = 9  
HDUP = 3  
VDUP = 3  
Field B  
B01  
X01  
Unlinked subfields, alpha (B),  
numeric (01)  
STARTDATA:  
STEPMASK:  
RPT = 1  
RST = 0  
(No HDUP or VDUP)  
Printed Results:  
Page #1:  
A01 A01 A01 B01  
A02 A02 A02  
A03 A03 A03  
Page #2:  
A01 A01 A01 B02  
A02 A02 A02  
A03 A03 A03  
Commands  
4–27  
 
Example  
The following program will produce the Incremental Alphanumeric data  
example at the bottom of the previous page. The program elements are also  
defined. (Refer to the command format on page 4–22.)  
ALPHA  
I;1;1;0;0;001;RPT3;RST9;*A01*  
I;3;1;0;0;001;RPT1;RST0;*B01*  
STOP  
where:  
I;1;1;0;0;001;RPT3;RST9;*A01*  
Incremental alphanumeric command;  
SR of 1; SC of 1;  
VE and HE are 0;  
001 stepmask increments by 1;  
RPT3 repeats each field value 3 times;  
RST9 prints and increments each field 9 times before resetting;  
*A01* is the starting value.  
I;3;1;0;0;001;RPT1;RST0;*B01*  
Incremental alphanumeric command;  
SR of 1; SC of 1; VE and HE are 0;  
001 stepmask increments by 1;  
RPT1 repeats each field value once;  
RST0 prints and increments each field 0 times before resetting;  
*B01* is the starting value.  
4–28  
Commands  
 
~CREATE;TEST;288  
VDUP;3;6  
ALPHA  
(Enters Create Form mode)  
(Repeats alpha string)  
(Alpha command)  
IAF1;5;6;5;4;4  
STOP  
(Ends Alpha command)  
VDUP;OFF  
END  
(Terminates Create Form mode)  
(Prints form)  
~EXECUTE;TEST  
~IAF1;+00002;*45678*  
~NORMAL  
Commands  
4–29  
 
Boxes  
Purpose  
Produces any variety of rectangular boxes.  
CREATE  
Mode  
Format  
BOX  
LT; SR; SC; ER; EC  
STOP  
BOX  
LT  
The Box command; enter BOX. Boxes expand down  
and to the right from the given row and column. (Note  
the position of the ending row and ending column; they  
do not include the line thickness.)  
Defines the line thickness, measured in dots. Line  
thickness is based on dot dimensions of 1/72”  
vertically and 1/60” horizontally. Enter a value of 1 or  
greater.  
SR  
Defines the starting row of the box. Enter a value  
ranging from row 1 through one less than the length of  
the form. Character row or dot row is specified based  
on the Scale command (page 4–88), or use the CP.DP  
format (page 4–7).  
SC  
ER  
Defines the starting column of the box. Enter a value  
ranging from column 1 through one less than the width  
of the form. Character column or dot column is  
specified based on the Scale command (page 4–88), or  
use the CP.DP format (page 4–7).  
Defines the ending row of the box. Enter a value  
ranging from row 2 through the last row of the form.  
The ending row must be greater than the starting row.  
Character row or dot row is specified based on the  
Scale command (page 4–88), or use the CP.DP format  
(page 4–7).  
4–30  
Commands  
 
NOTE: If the SCALE;DOT command is used to specify the dot resolution,  
the line thickness will be specified in that dot scale, rather than as  
the standard 1/72” line.  
EC  
Defines the ending column of the box. Enter a value  
ranging from column 2 through the last column of the  
form. The ending column must be greater than the  
starting column. Character column or dot column is  
specified based on the Scale command (page 4–88), or  
use the CP.DP format (page 4–7).  
STOP  
Stop indicates the end of the Box command; enter  
STOP, and the IGP/PGL will wait for a new command.  
If not entered, the IGP/PGL will wait for another set of  
Box command parameters.  
Example  
The following program and example in Figure 4–4 defines two boxes. To  
illustrate positioning, the starting row and column are indicated on the  
example but do not necessarily reflect actual location on the page. (Note the  
position of the ending row and ending column; they do not include the line  
thickness.)  
BOX  
3;24;16;51;63  
2;44;48;46;58  
STOP  
(One box three dot rows thick)  
(One box two dot rows thick)  
Commands  
4–31  
 
COLUMN 16  
R
46  
ROW 51  
COLUMN 63  
Figure 4–4. Box Example  
4–32  
Commands  
 
Compressed Print (Density)  
Purpose  
Mode  
Defines the horizontal print density in characters per inch (cpi).  
NORMAL, EXECUTE  
Format  
(cc) DENSITY ;n  
(cc)  
The Special Function Control Character.  
DENSITY  
The Density command; enter DENSITY.  
n
Selects the density in cpi, OCR–A, or OCR–B; enter a  
value of 10, 12, 13, 15, 17 or 20 to specify the density  
in characters per inch (the default is 10 cpi), or 10A to  
select 10 cpi OCR–A or 10B to select 10 cpi OCR–B.  
Comments Print density formats of 10, 12, 13, 15, 17 or 20 cpi are available. Default  
print density is 10 cpi. After a Density command is entered, all subsequent  
alphanumerics print at the specified density until another Density  
command, a Normal mode command, or a Reset command is entered. The  
Density command also permits the standard printer editing function  
(carriage return editing). After the Density command is entered, data in the  
print buffer can be edited.  
Example  
The following command selects 15 cpi printing format until another  
Density command, a Normal mode command, or a Reset command is  
entered.  
~DENSITY;15  
Commands  
4–33  
 
Configuration  
Purpose  
Places the IGP/PGL in the Configuration mode, where changes to any or all  
of the IGP/PGL configuration parameters via software control can be made  
instead of from the printer control panel.  
Mode  
NORMAL  
NOTE:  
A separate line is required for the CONFIG command, the parameters and  
values, and the END command.  
Format  
(cc)CONFIG  
parameter;value  
END  
(cc)  
The Special Function Control Character (SFCC).  
CONFIG  
parameter;value  
The Configuration command; enter CONFIG.  
The parameter for which a configuration change is  
desired, and the value associated with that parameter.  
The available parameters are listed in Table 4–2, and  
the associated values are shown in Table 1–4 on page  
1–13.  
END  
Terminates the CONFIG command; enter END.  
Table 4–2. CONFIG Command Parameters  
AUTO  
WRAP  
LEFT MARGIN  
SLEW RANGE  
AUTO EJECT  
RESET  
TOP/BOTTOM MARGIN  
UPPERCASE  
CARRIAGE RETURN DEF  
LINE FEED DEF  
SFCC  
SKIP PREFIX  
4–34  
Commands  
 
NOTE: All CONFIG parameters except RESET must be followed by a  
semicolon (;). Any CONFIG parameters not entered in  
UPPERCASE and exactly as listed in this table will result in an  
Error 156. (Refer to the “Error Codes” chapter.)  
Comments The IGP/PGL configuration parameters available are also defined in  
Chapter 2.  
Any or all parameters can be used within one CONFIG command, and they  
can be listed in any order. List each parameter;value on a separate line,  
terminating with the END command. Each CONFIG parameter, except the  
RESET parameter, must be followed by a semicolon (;). Default  
configuration values can be reset using the CONFIG command.  
Parameters not followed by a value, and parameters followed by any  
non–zero value are interpreted as “true” or “enabled” values. For carriage  
return and line feed definitions, a zero value does not change the data  
stream. However, for non–zero values, a carriage return character or line  
feed character will be interpreted as a carriage return plus a line feed.  
Parameters not listed in this command remain unchanged. If a parameter  
error is detected for parameters other than 0 or 1 (i.e., SFCC, Top/Bottom  
Margin, Left Margin), the value will default to the current configuration  
from external printer memory.  
Example 1 The following command enables IGP/PGL Auto Wrap, disables Auto Eject,  
and selects 6 lpi printing.  
~CONFIG  
AUTO WRAP;1  
AUTO EJECT;0  
LPI;6  
END  
Example 2 The following command resets all control panel IGP/PGL configuration  
parameters back to default values.  
~CONFIG  
RESET  
END  
Commands  
4–35  
 
Corners  
Purpose  
Mode  
Defines corner sets.  
CREATE  
Format  
CORNER  
LT; SR; SC; ER; EC; VL; HL  
STOP  
CORNER  
Enter CORNER to expand corners down and to the  
right from the given row and column.  
LT  
Defines the line thickness, measured in dots. Line  
thickness is based on dot dimensions of 1/72”  
vertically. Enter a value of 1 or greater.  
SR  
SC  
ER  
Defines the starting row of the corner. Enter a value  
ranging from row 1 through one less than the length of  
the form. Character row or dot row is specified based  
on the Scale command (page 4–88), or use the CP.DP  
format (page 4–7).  
Defines the starting column of the corner. Enter a value  
ranging from column 1 through one less than the width  
of the form. Character column or dot column is  
specified based on the Scale command (page 4–88), or  
use the CP.DP format (page 4–7).  
Defines the ending row of the corner. Enter a value  
ranging from row 2 through the last row of the form.  
The ending row must be greater than the starting row.  
Character row or dot row is specified based on the  
Scale command (page 4–88), or use the CP.DP format  
(page 4–7).  
4–36  
Commands  
 
NOTE: If the SCALE;DOT command is used to specify the dot resolution,  
the line thickness will be specified in that dot scale, rather than as  
the standard 1/72” line.  
EC  
Defines the ending column of the corner. Enter a value  
ranging from column 2 through the last column of the  
form. The ending column must be greater than the  
starting column. Character column or dot column is  
specified based on the Scale command (page 4–88), or  
use the CP.DP format (page 4–7).  
VL  
Defines the length of the vertical arm (including the  
line thickness) of each corner in the set. Enter a value  
of 1 or greater specified in character or dot rows based  
on the Scale command (page 4–88), or use the CP.DP  
format (page 4–7).  
HL  
Defines the length of the horizontal arm (including the  
line thickness) of each corner in the set. Enter a value  
of 1 or greater specified in character or dot columns  
based on the Scale command (page 4–88), or use the  
CP.DP format (page 4–7).  
STOP  
Stop indicates the end of the CORNER command;  
enter STOP, and the IGP/PGL will wait for a new  
command. If not entered, the IGP/PGL will wait for  
another set of Corner command parameters.  
Example  
The following program specifies a corner set as shown in Figure 4–5. To  
illustrate positioning, the starting row and column are indicated on the  
example but do not necessarily reflect actual location on the page. (Note the  
position of the ending row and ending column; they do not include the line  
thickness.)  
CORNER  
5;27;27;42;55;4;6  
STOP  
(Each corner in the set is 5 dot rows thick)  
(4 character rows high, 6 character columns wide)  
Commands  
4–37  
 
COLUMN 27  
HORIZONTAL LENGTH  
6 COLUMNS  
R
ERTICAL  
ENGTH  
ROWS  
42  
Figure 4–5. Corner Example  
4–38  
Commands  
 
Create  
Purpose  
Places the IGP/PGL in the Create Form mode, where forms and form  
elements can be defined using the appropriate commands.  
Mode  
NORMAL  
Format  
(cc)CREATE; [/]formname [;FL] [;DISK]  
(cc)  
The Special Function Control Character.  
CREATE  
The Create Form mode command; enter CREATE.  
/
The optional debug character to check the program line  
by line for incorrect parameters and print boundaries  
using the current page size; enter the slash symbol (/)  
to debug the program. No checks are made until the  
completed program is sent to the IGP/PGL for storage  
(when the form is executed by printing the file with the  
IGP/PGL program). Then the form name is entered  
into the directory, and the program is evaluated. If  
errors are detected, the program will print, line by line  
(including the error on the line where the error occurs),  
followed by the error–free sections of the form.  
Correct all errors and delete the slash. Refer to  
“Solving Program Errors” on page 6–49.  
formname  
Defines the form name of the form being created. The  
form name should be no more than 12 characters in  
length. Refer to page 4–5 for a list of allowable form  
name characters. If a form is created with the same  
name as a form already existing in memory, the newly  
created form will replace the existing form. All future  
reference to the form (editing, executing, or deleting  
the form from the directory) must be made using the  
assigned name.  
Commands  
4–39  
 
FL  
The optional forms length parameter to specify the  
maximum length of the form. (Form length cannot  
exceed the physical length of the page. Refer to  
Appendix C). Specify the form length in one of three  
ways:  
a. Enter 0 to define a form of unspecified length.  
The form will end after the longest element; that  
is, the form length is automatically controlled to  
contain all elements without extra length beyond  
the longest element. This can be used to  
eliminate wasted paper after producing short  
forms.  
b. Enter a value for the form length ranging from 1  
to 65,535 to specify the forms length in dot  
rows. (12 dot rows per line = 6 lpi spacing; 9 dot  
rows per line = 8 lpi spacing.)  
NOTE: Dot row range for setting the forms length depends on the forms  
length configuration. Refer to page 4–64 for information on how to  
configure the forms length.  
When the host form length configuration option is enabled, the form  
length and width values defined in this command, set the physical  
length and width page size.  
c. To specify the default forms length of 792 dot  
rows (11 inches at 6 lpi), do not enter a value in  
the form length parameter.  
DISK  
Optional parameter to store the form on the IGP/PGL  
external memory module. Enter DISK.  
Example  
The following command creates a form named ORDER with the default  
forms length:  
(cc)CREATE;ORDER  
4–40  
Commands  
 
Delete Form  
Purpose  
Deletes the form identified by the form name from the directory and the  
IGP/PGL memory.  
Mode  
NORMAL  
Format  
(cc)DELETE FORM; formname [;DISK]  
(cc)  
The Special Function Control Character.  
DELETE FORM The Delete Form command; enter DELETE FORM.  
formname  
DISK  
Identifies the form to be deleted. Enter the name of the  
form exactly as it was created. You can delete an entire  
form directory by inputting *ALL as the form name.  
Optional parameter to delete the form from the printer  
external memory module where it was originally  
stored. Enter DISK.  
NOTE: *ALL cannot be used in conjunction with DISK parameter.  
Comments For more information, refer to the Directory Example and the Delete  
Example on pages 6–47 and 6–48.  
Example  
The following command deletes the form named “PAY#” from the  
directory, IGP/PGL memory, and the printer external memory.  
~DELETE FORM;PAY#;DISK  
Commands  
4–41  
 
Delete Logo  
Purpose  
Deletes the logo identified by the logo name from the directory and the  
IGP/PGL memory.  
Mode  
NORMAL  
Format  
(cc)DELETE LOGO; logoname [;DISK]  
(cc)  
The Special Function Control Character.  
DELETE LOGO The Delete Form command; enter DELETE LOGO.  
logoname  
DISK  
Identifies the logo to be deleted. Enter the name of the  
logo exactly as it was created. You can delete an entire  
logo directory by inputting *ALL as the logo name.  
Optional parameter to delete the logo from the printer  
external memory module where it was originally  
stored. Enter DISK.  
Comments Printing a form that contains a deleted logo will produce an error message.  
For more information, refer to the Directory Example and the Delete  
Example on pages 6–47 and 6–48.  
Example  
The following command deletes the logo named “MEMO” from the  
directory, IGP/PGL memory, and the printer external memory.  
~DELETE LOGO;MEMO;DISK  
4–42  
Commands  
 
Directory  
Purpose  
Prints the following information: (1) all defined forms and logos, (2) logo  
assignment to forms, and (3) memory usage and availability.  
Mode  
NORMAL  
Format  
(cc)DIRECTORY  
(cc)  
The Special Function Control Character.  
DIRECTORY  
The Directory command; enter DIRECTORY.  
Comments As many forms and logos as printer memory allows may be stored in  
IGP/PGL memory. If the memory is full, the form will not print; available  
space in the memory must be at least the size of the form being executed.  
For more information, refer to the Directory Example on page 6–47.  
Commands  
4–43  
 
Duplication, Horizontal  
Purpose  
Defines both the number of times form elements are duplicated horizontally  
and the spacing between each duplication.  
Mode  
CREATE  
Format  
HDUP; dup#; offset#  
elements to be duplicated  
HDUP;OFF  
HDUP  
The Horizontal Duplication command; enter HDUP.  
dup#  
Specifies the duplication number, which is the number  
of times the entered form element(s) will repeat  
horizontally. Enter a value ranging from 1 to 255.  
offset#  
Specifies the horizontal offset to establish the  
horizontal spacing between each duplication of the  
form element(s) specified in the body of the command.  
Enter a value in terms of dot or character columns  
based on the Scale command (page 4–88), or use the  
CP.DP format (page 4–7). The offset is from starting  
column to starting column.  
HDUP;OFF  
Terminates the Horizontal Duplication command; enter  
HDUP;OFF. If not entered, the IGP/PGL expects  
another form element to be defined for duplication. A  
single HDUP command can define different types of  
elements for duplication.  
4–44  
Commands  
 
Example  
The following example is a horizontal duplication of a series of vertical  
lines. To illustrate positioning, starting row and column are indicated on the  
example but do not necessarily reflect actual location on the page.  
HDUP;14;4  
VERT  
(14 duplications with 4–character column spacing)  
(Command to duplicate horizontally)  
(Note CP.DP format: 59.6)  
1;10;59;59.6  
1;10.3;58.9;59.9  
1;11;58.6;60  
1;11.3;58.3;60.3  
1;12;58;60.6  
1;12.3;58.3;60.3  
1;13;58.6;60  
1;13.3;58.9;59.9  
STOP  
(Stops the command to duplicate element)  
(Terminates the horizontal duplication)  
HDUP;OFF  
COLUMN 10  
COLUMN 11  
COLUMN 12  
COLUMN 13  
ROW 58  
ROW 60.6  
COLUMN 13.3  
COLUMN 12.3  
COLUMN 11.3  
COLUMN 10.3  
Commands  
4–45  
 
Duplication, Vertical  
Purpose  
Defines both the number of times elements are duplicated vertically and the  
spacing between each duplication.  
Mode  
CREATE  
Format  
VDUP; dup#; offset#  
elements to be duplicated  
VDUP;OFF  
VDUP  
The Vertical Duplication command; enter VDUP.  
dup#  
Specifies the duplication number – the number of times  
the entered form element(s) will repeat vertically. Enter  
a value ranging from 1 to 255.  
offset#  
Specifies the vertical offset to establish the vertical  
spacing between each duplication of the form  
element(s) specified in the body of the command.  
Enter a value in terms of dot or character columns  
based on the Scale command (page 4–88), or use the  
CP.DP format (page 4–7). The offset is from starting  
row to starting row.  
VDUP;OFF  
Terminates the Vertical Duplication command; enter  
VDUP;OFF. If not entered, the IGP/PGL expects  
another form element to be defined for duplication. A  
single VDUP command can define different types of  
elements for duplication.  
4–46  
Commands  
 
Example  
The following example is a vertical duplication of one horizontal line. The  
line is duplicated three times. To illustrate positioning, the starting row and  
column are indicated on the example but do not necessarily reflect actual  
location on the page.  
VDUP;3;2  
HORZ  
(3 duplications with 2–character row spacing)  
(Command to duplicate vertically)  
1;52;15;65  
STOP  
(Stops the command to duplicate element)  
(Terminates the vertical duplication)  
VDUP;OFF  
COLUMN 15  
COLUMN 65  
ROW 5
ROW 5
ROW 5
Commands  
4–47  
 
End  
Purpose  
Terminates the current mode of operation and must be used before entering  
a new mode command (EXECUTE, LOGO, NORMAL, or even CREATE).  
Mode  
CREATE  
END  
Format  
Comments After the End command is received, the IGP/PGL flushes program errors,  
stores the error–free portions of the form program just completed, and then  
returns to the Normal mode. If the debug slash (/) is included in the Create  
command, the program prints with any corresponding error messages.  
4–48  
Commands  
 
Execute Form Mode  
How to Use the Execute Command  
Forms are printed in the Execute Form mode. In addition to printing the form  
in the Execute Form mode, variable data can also be entered onto the form  
“dynamically” during the Execute Form mode. This dynamic data input  
during the Execute Form mode includes page numbers, alphanumeric data  
fields, and bar code data fields. Pagination, described on page 4–78, is  
performed in the Execute Form mode. Dynamic alphanumeric and bar code  
data require additional commands within the Execute Form mode.  
The fastest method for repeated forms printing is to use the form feed  
character. Rather than sending a series of Execute/Normal commands, which  
slows the process by performing an open—print—close form sequence, the  
form feed character instructs the IGP/PGL to start a new page with new  
dynamic and overlay data using the existing Execute commands for the form.  
The Dynamic Data—Overlay Data—Form Feed Character sequence can be  
repeated indefinitely while maintaining the optimum print speed within the  
original Execute command.  
Remember, when a form count is not specified, a single line spacing (or a  
line containing overlay data) must always separate an EXECUTE command  
from a NORMAL command.  
Commands  
4–49  
 
To Execute Forms Rapidly  
In order to save reloading time, the PGL remembers the last form executed.  
However, a form must be loaded if it was not the last form executed, if it was  
used with a CREATE command since the last EXECUTE, or if any logo has  
been created.  
Use the SETUP command to define forms at power up and execute them  
from internal memory rather than from external memory.  
When the form to be executed is not found in internal memory, the default  
external memory module is automatically searched. If the form is found, it is  
loaded into internal memory and execution resumes; otherwise, the “FORM  
NOT FOUND” error is printed.  
NOTE: If an older application uses the disk parameter for the execute  
command, it is ignored and the above steps are taken.  
Print Formats in the Execute Form Mode  
The Execute Form mode has two print formats. The standard execute  
command format, shown below, is used for executing nonincremental data  
and incremental fixed data. An incremental Execute command format,  
containing two additional parameters, is used for executing incremental  
dynamic data and is discussed on page 4–56.  
During the Execute Form mode, the IGP/PGL responds to regular print  
format commands such as 8 lpi, and elongated characters. Some commands  
can be used in other modes in addition to the Execute Form mode. For  
example, Compressed Print, Expanded Print, Execute, Ignore, Select Format,  
and Vertical Line Spacing, which are also Normal mode commands, can be  
used in the Execute or Create Form modes. The IGP/PGL alternate character  
set can also be used in the Execute Form mode.  
4–50  
Commands  
 
Execute Form: General Format  
Purpose  
Mode  
Prints forms created in the CREATE mode.  
NORMAL  
Format  
(cc)EXECUTE ;formname [;PAGEn] [;FC] [;ICNTn] [;IRSTn]  
[(cc)AFn; (D)ASCII text(D)]  
[(cc)BFn; (D)data(D)]  
[(cc)IAFn; [idir] STEPMASK; [RPTn;] [RSTn;] (D)STARTDATA(D)]  
[(cc)IBFn; [idir] STEPMASK; [RPTn;] [RSTn;] (D)STARTDATA(D)]  
[Overlay Data]  
[Form Feed character]  
(cc)NORMAL  
(cc)  
The Special Function Control Character.  
EXECUTE  
formname  
The Execute Form command; enter EXECUTE.  
Identifies a previously defined form by name. Enter the  
form name exactly as used when created.  
PAGE n  
The optional Pagination command; enter PAGE and  
replace n with the decimal number of the starting page  
in a sequence of multiple pages. The number may be  
eight digits long and range between 0 and 99999999.  
The next page after 99999999 is 0. Leave a blank  
space between the PAGE command and the n value.  
The page number will print on the form in the location  
defined by the Page Number command in the Create  
Form mode. If the location of the pagination field was  
not specified in the Create Form mode, the page field  
is printed in the upper left corner of the form.  
Commands  
4–51  
 
FC  
The optional form count parameter specifies the  
number of copies of the form to print. Enter the  
appropriate number.  
When the last page prints, the IGP/PGL returns to the  
Normal mode automatically. Do not use the form count  
parameter if dynamic data (AFn and BFn parameters),  
incremental data (ICNT or IRST parameters), overlay  
data, or EVFU data are used in the Execute command.  
ICNTn  
IRSTn  
The optional incremental form count. Enter ICNT and  
the Incremental value as described in the Execute  
Incremental Dynamic Data command described on  
page 4–56.  
The optional incremental reset count parameter. Enter  
IRST and the reset value as described in the Execute  
Incremental Dynamic Data command described on  
page 4–56.  
AFn;(D)ASCII text(D)  
The Execute Dynamic Alphanumeric Data command.  
Enter the dynamic alphanumeric data during the  
Execute Form mode as described in “Execute Form:  
Dynamic Alphanumeric Data” on page 4–54.  
BFn ;(D)data(D) The Execute Dynamic Bar Code Data command. Enter  
the dynamic bar code data during the Execute Form  
mode as described in “Execute Form: Dynamic Bar  
Code Data” on page 4–55.  
(cc)IAFn;[idir] STEPMASK;[RPTn;] [RSTn;] (D)STARTDATA(D)  
The Execute Incremental Dynamic Alphanumeric Data  
command. Supply the data as described on page 4–57.  
(cc)IBFn; [idir] STEPMASK; [RPTn;] [RSTn;](D)STARTDATA(D)  
The Execute Incremental Dynamic Bar Code Data  
command. Supply the data as described on page 4–57.  
4–52  
Commands  
 
Overlay Data  
Overlay data can be entered during the Execute Form  
mode. (The words “Overlay Data” are not part of the  
Execute command. They are shown in the command  
sequence to indicate that actual overlay data can be  
entered following the Execute command.) Refer to  
“Execute Form: Overlay Data” on page 4–59.  
Form Feed Character  
Optional command instructing the IGP/PGL to start a  
new page with new EVFU, dynamic, and overlay data  
using the existing Execute commands for the current  
form. Using this EVFU Data—Dynamic Data and  
Overlay Data—Form Feed Character sequence can be  
repeated indefinitely, while maintaining the optimum  
print speed, within the original Execute command.  
(cc)NORMAL  
The Normal mode command. If the form count  
parameter was not used in the Execute command, enter  
the SFCC and NORMAL to return the IGP/PGL to the  
Normal mode.  
The Normal mode command is input following all  
other Execute commands to enter variable data. (Refer  
to the following sections.) Input a line terminator to  
leave a blank line before entering the Normal  
command.  
Commands  
4–53  
 
Execute Form: Dynamic Alphanumeric Data  
Purpose  
Incorporates the dynamic alphanumeric data into a previously identified  
location on a form.  
Mode  
EXECUTE  
Format  
(cc)AFn; (D)ASCII text(D)  
AFn  
Indicates a dynamic alphanumeric field (AF) and its  
data (n). Enter AF and replace n with the number of  
the data field corresponding to the number used to  
identify the field when it was defined with the  
Alphanumeric command in the Create Form mode.  
D
The printable character identifying the start and finish  
of the alphanumeric data. Enter any printable character  
other than a slash (/), the SFCC, or a character used  
within the data. The same character must be used at  
both ends of the data field but will not be printed with  
the data.  
ASCII text  
The group of ASCII characters (the alphanumeric  
string) to print. Enter any of the standard ASCII  
printable characters (except the character used as  
delimiters described in the D parameter). The data  
appears on the form at the location identified by n.  
NOTE:  
Commands can appear anywhere in the overlay text with PGL.  
Comments The location for the Dynamic alphanumeric data must have been previously  
identified using the AFn;L parameters of the alphanumerics command in  
the Create Form mode. Inputting individual commands enters the new data  
into the identified location each time the form is printed.  
You can repeat the (cc)AFn;(D)ASCII text(D) sequence to complete as  
many data fields as you defined on the form in the Create Form mode. You  
can also combine the Execute Dynamic Bar Code Data command in the  
same Execute command sequence. Each “page” of dynamic data (the  
dynamic fields, data, and overlay data) for the form must be separated from  
the next page of new dynamic data by a form feed.  
4–54  
Commands  
 
Execute Form: Dynamic Bar Code Data  
Purpose  
Incorporates the dynamic bar code data into a previously identified location  
on a form.  
Mode  
EXECUTE  
Format  
(cc)BFn; (D)data field(D)  
BFn  
Indicates a dynamic bar code field (BF) and its data  
(n). Enter BF and replace n with the number of the  
data field corresponding to the number used to identify  
the field when it was defined with the bar code  
command during the Create Form mode.  
D
The printable character (quotation marks for example)  
identifying the start and finish of the bar code data.  
Enter any printable character other than a slash (/), the  
SFCC, or a character used within the data. The same  
character must be used at both ends of the data field  
but will not be printed with the data.  
data field  
Enter the characters for the bar code data. The type of  
characters allowed in the data varies with the type of  
bar code. Refer to the data field descriptions for the  
selected bar code types.  
NOTE:  
Commands can appear anywhere in the overlay text with PGL.  
Comments The bar code location must have been previously identified using the  
BFn;L or BFn parameters of a bar code command in the Create Form  
mode. Then use the appropriate bar code command to enter the bar code  
data in that location. Inputting individual commands enters new bar code  
data into the identified location each time the form is printed.  
You can repeat the (cc)BFn;(D)data field(D) sequence to complete as many  
bar code data fields as were defined on the form in the Create Form mode.  
You can also combine the Execute Dynamic Alphanumeric Data command  
in the same Execute command sequence. Each “page” of dynamic data (the  
dynamic fields, data, and overlay data) for the form must be separated from  
the next page of new dynamic data by a form feed.  
Commands  
4–55  
 
Execute Form: Incremental Dynamic Data  
Purpose  
Incorporates incremental/decremental capability to dynamic alphanumeric  
or bar code data supplied as a part of the Execute Form mode.  
Mode  
NORMAL  
NOTE:  
In the command below, incremental Execute parameters are shown in  
boldface type; standard Execute command parameters are shown in italics.  
The general Execute format is shown on page 4–51.  
Format  
(cc)EXECUTE; formname [;PAGE n] [;FC] [;ICNTn] [;IRSTn]  
ICNTn  
IRSTn  
Identifies the incremental form count to specify the  
number of forms to generate with the incremental  
fields automatically updated. Enter ICNT and replace  
n with a value ranging from 1 to 65,535 to specify the  
number of forms.  
The optional incremental reset count parameter to  
specify the number of forms to generate before  
resetting all incremental fields to their starting values.  
The reset count parameter is useful in dividing the total  
number of forms generated into multiple groups of  
identical copies. To use this parameter, enter IRST and  
replace n with a value ranging from 1 to 65,535 to  
specify the reset count (how many forms generated  
before resetting the incremental fields). If the reset  
count value is equal to or greater than the incremental  
count value, the reset will never occur.  
Example  
The following forms were generated from ICNT6, IRST2. (To duplicate  
incremental fields within a form, refer to page 4–25.)  
0
1
2
3
4
5
0
1
2
3
4
5
0
1
2
3
4
5
form1  
form2  
form3  
form4  
form5  
form6 = ICNT6  
4–56  
Commands  
 
Supplying Dynamic Data for Incremental Fields  
Incremental dynamic data fields are created in the Create Form mode using  
the incremental alphanumeric or bar code commands. The incremental  
dynamic data itself is supplied during the Execute Form mode at the top of  
the form prior to any overlay data. The incremental dynamic data (either  
alphanumeric or bar code data) can be changed with each new batch of  
forms. Incremental dynamic data fields specified in the Create Form mode  
will not appear on the form if corresponding incremental dynamic data is not  
supplied in the Execute Form mode.  
Format  
For incremental dynamic alphanumeric data:  
(cc)IAFn; [idir] STEPMASK; [RPTn;] [RSTn;] (D)STARTDATA(D)  
For incremental dynamic bar code data:  
(cc)IBFn; [idir] STEPMASK; [RPTn;] [RSTn;] (D)STARTDATA(D)  
(cc)  
IAF  
The Special Function Control Character.  
Identifies the command as incremental alphanumeric  
dynamic data; enter IAF.  
IBF  
n
Identifies the command as incremental bar code  
dynamic data; enter IBF.  
Identifies the field number of the dynamic data field as  
entered in the Create Form mode. Replace n with the  
number used to identify the field when it was defined.  
idir  
The optional increment direction parameter to specify  
an increase or decrease of the data. Enter a plus sign  
(+) or leave the field blank to increment (the default).  
Enter a minus sign () to decrement.  
STEPMASK  
Defines the increment amount (step), the number of  
character positions in the data field, and provides a  
mask to control the increment function on specific  
parts of the data. Refer to “Incremental Bar Code  
Fields” on page 5–116 or “Alphanumerics, Incremental  
Fields” on page 4–18 for complete information on  
STEPMASK parameter values.  
Commands  
4–57  
 
RPTn  
The optional incremental repeat count parameter to  
specify the number of times a particular field value is  
repeated before it is incremented. A repeated field  
value is useful when printing multiple rows/columns of  
identical labels before incrementing to the next value.  
To use the repeat count parameter, enter RPT and  
replace n with a numeric value ranging from 1 to  
65,535 to specify the repeat count. The default repeat  
count parameter is 1, which will increment the field  
value each time it is printed.  
RSTn  
The optional incremental reset count parameter to  
specify the number of times an incremented field is  
printed (on one or more forms) before it is reset to the  
starting value. A reset count is useful when printing a  
hierarchy of fields where a low–level field generates a  
sequence of numbers, is reset, and the next higher field  
level is incremented (such as in a unit/box/carton  
application).  
To use the reset count parameter, enter RST and  
replace n with a number ranging from 1 to 65,535 to  
specify the reset count. The default reset count value  
is 0.  
STARTDATA  
Defines the starting value of the incrementing field.  
The maximum amount of STARTDATA characters  
must be equal to or less than the number of characters  
in the STEPMASK field. If the number of data  
characters in dynamic alphanumeric data commands is  
less than the number used in STEPMASK, the data  
will print right justified with preceding spaces.  
(Leading spaces are not provided for bar code data.)  
For dynamic bar code data, the type of characters  
allowed for incrementing fields is based on the type of  
bar code. Refer to the individual bar code descriptions  
in the “Bar Codes” chapter for information on valid  
type and quantity of data characters. The STARTDATA  
must be enclosed within standard printable character  
delimiters just as a standard data field is enclosed  
within delimiters.  
4–58  
Commands  
 
Execute Form: Overlay Data  
Overlay data is variable alphanumeric data entered onto a predefined form.  
The form is completed by positioning the data in the exact location it will  
appear on the form when printed. The data is placed horizontally using tabs  
and spaces, and vertically using line feeds, form feeds, and the EVFU.  
For example, if the serial number field on the form begins at character row  
22, and column 14, enter 22 line feeds, space over 14 columns, and input  
serial number overlay data. An entire form can be completed with a page of  
overlay data in this manner. Overlay data at the end of a form is printed on a  
new form until all overlay data is used. Then, to advance to the next form,  
use a form feed.  
The IGP/PGL Electronic Vertical Format Unit can be used to control vertical  
spacing of the overlay data. In place of line feed commands input  
individually, the EVFU can be programmed (during the Execute Form mode)  
to slew the overlay data page to the predetermined lines with a single  
command.  
NOTE: When using the PGL, the Dynamic Data command and Overlay  
IGP/PGL commands may be issued on the same line as the overlay  
text to synchronize the printer with systems that count lines (e.g.,  
IBM). See the IGP/PGL command standard for inline command  
format on page 4–3.  
Commands  
4–59  
 
Expanded Print  
Purpose  
Mode  
Selects font sizes other than the default font.  
NORMAL, EXECUTE  
Format  
(cc)EXPAND; VE; HE  
(cc)  
The Special Function Control Character.  
EXPAND  
VE  
The Expanded Print command; enter EXPAND.  
Specifies the vertical expansion factor; enter a value  
ranging from 0 to 139.  
HE  
Specifies the horizontal expansion factor; enter a value  
ranging from 0 to 139. Both VE and HE parameters  
must be zero or non–zero. One expansion value cannot  
be specified as 0 if the other is not. A VE or HE setting  
of 1 expands the appropriate plane but produces  
single–size characters. A VE and HE setting of 0  
produces standard–size characters.  
Comments The Expanded Print command uses the 0.10–inch, 10 cpi Gothic typeface  
as the default base value from which alphanumeric characters are  
expanded. (Refer to the Font command on page 4–61 for more information  
about available typefaces and styles.)  
The character height can be up to a maximum of 13.9 inches, which means  
if a page is 13.9 inches high, you can print a character that fills the entire  
height of the page.  
After an Expanded Print command is entered, all subsequent alphanumerics  
print at the specified expansion until another Expanded Print command, a  
Normal mode command, or a Reset command is entered. An Expanded  
Print command with VE and HE set to 0 selects standard character printing.  
Example  
The following command results in character printing at 25 times its vertical  
and 40 times its horizontal size.  
~EXPAND;25;40  
4–60  
Commands  
 
Font  
Purpose  
Selects typefaces other than the default Gothic font.  
NORMAL, CREATE, EXECUTE  
Mode  
Format  
(cc)FONT [;FACE #] [;BOLD #] [;SLANT #] [;SYMSET #] [;POINT #]  
NOTE:  
The font is activated according to the changed options upon receipt of the  
font command.  
(cc)  
The Special Function Control Character. (If you are  
using the Font command in the CREATE mode, do not  
enter the SFCC.)  
FONT  
The Font command; enter FONT.  
FACE #  
Identifies the specific typeface. Enter FACE, a space,  
and the 5 digit typeface number representing the  
selected typeface.  
93952 = Courier Bold  
93779 = Letter Gothic Bold  
Other font numbers correspond to optional typefaces.  
Refer to the font instructions (that come packaged with  
the optional font external memory modules) for  
typeface numbers.  
See Appendix D.  
Do not use this command to select OCR–A and  
OCR–B. Instead, use either the Cn parameter in the  
Alphanumerics command or use the Compressed Print  
Density command.  
NOTE: The font # range 1–99 is reserved for HP LaserJet II downloadable  
fonts (refer to page 3–5, in Chapter 3).  
Commands  
4–61  
 
BOLD #  
SLANT #  
Selects a bold attribute. Enter BOLD, a space, and ON  
or 1 to turn bold on, or OFF or 0 for no bold attribute.  
Selects a slanting factor. (Slant is similar to italic, but  
also offers a backward slant.) Enter SLANT, a space,  
and RIGHT or 1 for a typical italic slant, LEFT or –1  
for a backward slant, or OFF or 0 for no slant attribute.  
SYMSET #  
POINT #  
Selects a font symbol set other than the default ASCII  
symbol set. Enter SYMSET, a space, and a value  
ranging from 0 to 31 representing the symbol set as  
identified in Table 7–1 on page 7–2 in the  
“Multinational Character Sets” chapter.  
Selects the point size for the current typeface. Enter  
POINT, a space, and a point size ranging from 4 to  
999. Point sizes are available in quarter–point  
increments. Horizontal pitch is automatically adjusted  
based on the point size selected.  
The point parameter cannot be used when in CREATE  
mode. Use the point parameter of the alpha command.  
NOTE:  
The fonts available are the standard font (#93779) and (#93952); OCR–A  
(#90993); and OCR–B (#91409). Other type face numbers will correspond  
to the CG Triumvirate font. CG Triumvirate is the proportional font and is  
available in the following point sizes.  
5
6
8
10  
12  
14  
18  
24  
30  
36  
Comments Font parameters in Normal and Execute modes do not affect the fonts that  
have already been established and saved on a form.  
Font commands issued in the Create mode affect only the current form  
being created and not any of the fonts on other forms or for Execute or  
Normal mode text.  
You can use any or all Font parameters, listed in any order, in a single Font  
command. (Do not list font parameters on separate lines.) Parameters and  
symbol sets not specified retain the previously selected value. Parameters  
incorrectly specified retain the previously selected value.  
4–62  
Commands  
 
All Font command parameters are reset to default values upon receiving a  
NORMAL, RESET, CONFIG;RESET, or new CREATE command.  
Multiple font commands within a single form will save the last font  
command parameters specified. Symbol sets can also be selected using the  
ISET or USET commands. (Refer to the “Multinational Character Sets”  
chapter.)  
Fonts in the HP LaserJet II format may also be downloaded to the printer.  
They may be downloaded into either the SRAM or FLASH memory  
modules, and then will be available permanently (at least as long as the  
FLASH or SRAM module is installed). Note that these fonts are  
proportional fonts. They may be selected using the FONT command;  
however, the POINT size, BOLD, ITALIC and SYMSET parameters are  
ignored.  
Use the PTX_SETUP command to download a font. Refer to Chapter 3 in  
this manual for details.  
The downloaded fonts are selected in the same manner as are the other  
expansion fonts, i.e., with the FONT command. The font number given in  
the download command will be the same number used in the FONT  
command to select it.  
Example  
The following command selects the Letter Gothic font (#93779) with a  
right slant. This font will continue to print until another Font command, a  
Normal mode command, or a Reset command is entered.  
~FONT;FACE 93779  
Commands  
4–63  
 
Form Length  
Purpose  
Mode  
Sets the length of the form to a specific number of lines at 6 or 8 lpi.  
CREATE  
Format  
LFORM6; n or LFORM8; n  
LFORM6  
LFORM8  
n
The Form Length command for 6 lpi forms; enter  
LFORM6.  
The Form Length command for 8 lpi forms; enter  
LFORM8.  
Specifies the forms length in total number of lines  
allowed per form. The range depends on the paper size  
used and the top/bottom margin setting. An error  
message will result if the maximum line values are  
exceeded.  
NOTE:  
This command affects only printed text inside of IGP/PGL forms, not the  
printer lpi. The LFORM8 command considers a line as 9 dot rows; the  
LFORM6 command considers a line as 12 dot rows. The 9 and 12 dot rows  
per line matches the dot rows of the printer in the DP mode if set to 8 or 6  
lpi, respectively.  
Example  
NOTE:  
The following example establishes a forms length of 8 inches (48 lines at 6  
lpi):  
LFORM6;48  
Additional information about page boundaries can be found in Appendix C.  
4–64  
Commands  
 
Ignore Sequence  
Purpose  
Enables the IGP/PGL to ignore all characters after the Ignore Sequence On  
(IGON) command is entered. All characters are ignored until the Ignore  
Sequence Off (IGOFF) command is entered.  
Mode  
NORMAL, CREATE, or EXECUTE  
(cc)IGON or (cc)IGOFF  
Format  
NOTE:  
A line terminator is not required in the Ignore Sequence.  
(cc)  
The Special Function Control Character.  
Ignore Sequence On command; enter IGON.  
Exits Ignore Sequence  
IGON  
IGOFF  
Comments IGON and IGOFF can also be used anywhere in the data stream.  
NOTE: Commands in PTX_SETUP and control characters used to  
download TIFF and PCX logos are not ignored.  
Commands  
4–65  
 
Line Spacing  
Purpose  
Mode  
Defines the lines per inch (lpi) printing format.  
NORMAL, EXECUTE  
Format  
(cc)LPI; n  
(cc)  
LPI  
n
The Special Function Control Character.  
The Vertical Line Spacing command; enter LPI.  
Selects the line spacing in lpi; enter any integer value  
from 1 to 10.  
Comments Standard line spacing is 6 lpi. After a Vertical Line Spacing command is  
entered, all subsequent alphanumerics print at the specified lpi until another  
Vertical Line Spacing command, a Normal mode command, or a Reset  
command is entered.  
Example  
The following command selects 9 lpi printing format until another Line  
Spacing command, a Normal mode command, or a Reset command is  
entered.  
~LPI;9  
4–66  
Commands  
 
Lines, Horizontal  
Purpose  
Mode  
Defines horizontal lines.  
CREATE  
Format  
HORZ  
LT; R; SC; EC  
STOP  
HORZ  
The Horizontal Line command; enter HORZ.  
LT  
Defines the line thickness, measured in 1/72” dots.  
Enter a value of 1 or greater. Horizontal line thickness  
expands downward from the given row.  
R
Defines the row to draw the horizontal line. Enter a  
value ranging from row 1 through one less than the  
length of the form. Character row or dot row is  
specified based on the Scale command (page 4–88), or  
use the CP.DP format (page 4–7).  
SC  
EC  
Defines the starting column of the horizontal line.  
Enter a value ranging from column 1 through one less  
than the width of the form. Character column or dot  
column is specified based on the Scale command (page  
4–88), or use the CP.DP format (page 4–7).  
Defines the ending column of the horizontal line. Enter  
a value ranging from column 2 through the last column  
of the form. The ending column must be greater than  
the starting column. Character column or dot column is  
specified based on the Scale command (page 4–88), or  
use the CP.DP format (page 4–7).  
STOP  
Stop indicates the end of the HORZ command; enter  
STOP. If not entered, the IGP/PGL will expect another  
set of Horizontal Line command parameters.  
Commands  
4–67  
 
Example  
The following example specifies 2 horizontal lines. The first line uses the  
character row in the R parameter, and the second line uses CP.DP format.  
To illustrate positioning, the starting row and column are indicated on the  
example but do not necessarily reflect actual location on the page.  
HORZ  
1;60;15;65  
1;60.5;15;65  
STOP  
COLUMN 15  
COLUMN 65  
OW 60  
OW 60.5  
NOTE: If the SCALE;DOT command is used to specify the dot resolution,  
then the line thickness will be specified in that scale.  
4–68  
Commands  
 
Lines, Vertical  
Purpose  
Mode  
Defines vertical lines.  
CREATE  
Format  
VERT  
LT; C; SR; ER  
STOP  
VERT  
The Vertical Line command; enter VERT.  
LT  
Defines the line thickness, measured in 1/60” dots.  
Enter a value of 1 or greater. Vertical line thickness  
expands to the right from the starting column.  
C
Defines the column where the vertical line begins.  
Enter a value ranging from column 1 through one less  
than the width of the form. Character column or dot  
column is specified based on the Scale command (page  
4–88), or use the CP.DP format (page 4–7).  
SR  
ER  
Defines the starting row of the vertical line. Enter a  
value ranging from row 1 through one less than the  
length of the form. Character row or dot row is  
specified based on the Scale command (page 4–88), or  
use the CP.DP format (page 4–7).  
Defines the ending row of the vertical line. Enter a  
value ranging from row 2 through the last column of  
the form. The ending row must be greater than the  
starting row. Character row or dot row is specified  
based on the Scale command (page 4–88), or use the  
CP.DP format (page 4–7).  
STOP  
Stop indicates the end of the VERT command; enter  
STOP. If not entered, the IGP/PGL expects another set  
of Vertical Line command parameters.  
Commands  
4–69  
 
Example  
The following program specifies 4 vertical lines. To illustrate positioning,  
the starting row and column are indicated on the example but do not  
necessarily reflect actual location on the page.  
VERT  
2;36;53;61  
2;50;53;61  
2;60;53;61  
2;70;53;61  
STOP  
COLUMN 36  
COLUMN 50  
NOTE: If the SCALE; DOT command is used to specify the dot resolution,  
the line thickness will be specified in that scale.  
4–70  
Commands  
 
Listen  
Purpose  
Disables the IGP/PGL from the “quiet” state and enables the IGP/PGL for  
standard operation. (The Quiet command is explained on page 4–84.)  
Mode  
NORMAL  
Format  
(cc)LISTEN  
(cc)  
The Special Function Control Character.  
LISTEN  
The Listen command; enter LISTEN.  
NOTE:  
When the IGP/PGL is in the quiet state, the currently selected line printer  
emulation commands are active. Refer to your printer Setup Guide for a  
description of these commands.  
Commands  
4–71  
 
Logo Call  
Purpose  
Selects and positions previously defined logo(s). (The logo itself is actually  
defined separately in the Create Logo mode.) The logo may be defined  
using TIFF files, PCX raster data, or IGP/PGL dots.  
Mode  
CREATE  
Format  
LOGO  
SR; SC; logoname  
STOP  
LOGO  
The Logo Call command; enter LOGO.  
SR  
Defines the starting row of the logo. The SR (and SC)  
parameter specifies the location for the logo based on  
the upper left corner of the grid in which the logo was  
defined. Enter a value ranging from row 1 through one  
less than the length of the form. Character row or dot  
row is specified based on the Scale command (page  
4–88), or use the CP.DP format (page 4–7).  
SC  
Defines the starting column of the logo. The SC (and  
SR) parameter specifies the location for the logo based  
on the upper left corner of the grid in which the logo  
was defined.  
Enter a value ranging from column 1 through one less  
than the width of the form. Character column or dot  
column is specified based on the Scale command (page  
4–88), or use the CP.DP format (page 4–7).  
logoname  
Identifies a previously defined logo by name for use on  
the form. Enter the logo name exactly as used to define  
and store the logo.  
STOP  
Stop indicates the end of the LOGO command; enter  
STOP, and the IGP/PGL will wait for a new command.  
If not entered, the IGP/PGL will expect another set of  
Logo Call command parameters.  
4–72  
Commands  
 
Example  
The following sample program specifies three logo calls placing the same  
logo at three different locations. (The logo was previously defined and  
stored.) The starting row and column specify the upper left corner of the  
grid in which the logo was defined. To illustrate positioning, the starting  
row and column are indicated on the example but do not necessarily reflect  
actual location on the page.  
LOGO  
56;35;HAND  
56;50;HAND  
56;65;HAND  
STOP  
S
When the logo to be executed is not found in memory, the default external  
memory module is automatically searched. If the logo is found, it is loaded  
into memory and execution resumes; otherwise, the “LOGO NOT FOUND”  
error is printed.  
NOTE: If an older application uses the disk parameter for the execute  
command, it is ignored and the above steps are taken.  
Commands  
4–73  
 
Logo Mode, Create  
Purpose  
Places the IGP/PGL in the Create Logo mode, where logos can be defined  
using the appropriate dot placements. (See TIFF Logo, page 4–92, and  
PCX Logo, page 4–81, commands to define logos using TIFF or PCX  
data.)  
Mode  
NORMAL  
Format  
(cc)LOGO; logoname; VL; HL [;DISK]  
row#; dot; dot1–dot2; dot  
END  
(cc)  
The Special Function Control Character.  
LOGO  
logoname  
The Logo command; enter LOGO.  
Enter a maximum of 12 alphanumeric characters for  
the name of the logo. (Refer to page 4–5 for a list of  
allowable Logo Name characters.) All future  
references to this logo (Delete Logo or Logo Call  
commands) must use this name. If a logo is defined  
with the same name as a logo already existing in  
memory, the newly defined logo will replace the  
existing logo.  
VL  
HL  
Defines the vertical length of the logo grid in dot rows;  
enter a value sufficient for the vertical size of the logo,  
not exceeding 252. The dot rows are vertically spaced  
1/72–inch apart.  
Defines the horizontal length of the logo grid in dot  
columns; enter a value sufficient for the horizontal size  
of the logo, not exceeding 240. On each row, the dots  
are horizontally spaced 1/60–inch apart.  
DISK  
row#  
Optional parameter to store the logo in the IGP/PGL  
internal memory modules. Enter DISK.  
Identifies the row number for each row of dots in the  
logo. Enter each row number on a separate command  
line. Rows are numbered sequentially from top to  
bottom.  
4–74  
Commands  
 
dot  
Identifies a single dot position in the row. Enter each  
dot number used. Dots are numbered sequentially from  
left to right.  
dot1–dot2  
Identifies a series of dot positions within the row,  
including dot1 on the left end and dot2 on the right  
end. Enter the series of dot rows. Series of dot rows  
can be combined with single dot positions in the same  
command line.  
END  
Terminates the Create Logo mode; enter END.  
Comments The logo is defined by specifying the overall size and the rows of data  
used. The actual number of logos you can create and store depends on the  
memory required for each logo.  
The maximum logo size allowed is 252 rows high (3.5 inches) and 240  
columns wide (4 inches). Values exceeding either of these dimensions will  
produce an error. To maximize memory space, do not define the vertical  
and horizontal length of the logo grid larger than is required to capture the  
design.  
The printer produces a grid with 72 dots per inch vertically and 60 dots per  
inch horizontally. Consequently, a logo must be designed using this scale.  
The Logo Call command (page 4–72) in the Create Form mode brings the  
predefined logo into a form. The starting row and column parameters refer  
to the upper left corner of the logo grid. Once created, the logo is ready to  
be used in any form and will print at the size shown.  
Example  
The following program shown on the next page produced the tape holder  
logo.  
Commands  
4–75  
 
~LOGO;TAPEHOLD;36;40  
1;12–18  
2;10–20  
3;9–22  
4;8–24  
5;7–25  
6;6–26  
7;5–26  
8;4–25  
9;4–25  
10;3–24  
11;3–24  
12;2–23  
13;2–23  
14;2–14;17–23  
15;1–12;19–22;38–39  
16;1–12;20–23;37–40  
17;1–11;20–23;37–40  
18;1–11;20–23;36–40  
19;1–11;20–23;36–40  
20;1–11;20–23;35–40  
21;1–12;20–24;35–40  
22;1–12;19–24;34–39  
23;1–14;17–25;33–39  
24;1–28;31–39  
25;1–39  
VL 36  
26;2–38  
27;2–38  
HL 40  
28;2–37  
29;3–37  
30;3–36  
31;3–36  
32;4–35  
33;5–34  
34;6–33  
35;7–32  
36;9–30  
END  
4–76  
Commands  
 
Normal Mode  
Purpose  
Places the IGP/PGL in the Normal mode of operation, where the data  
stream is not changed but monitored for a Special Function Control  
Character followed by an IGP/PGL command.  
Mode  
NORMAL, EXECUTE  
(cc)NORMAL  
Format  
(cc)  
The Special Function Control Character.  
NORMAL  
The Normal mode command; enter NORMAL.  
Comments Normal mode is entered automatically when the printer is powered on with  
IGP/PGL. In Normal mode, the IGP/PGL uses the default font and line  
spacing values.  
A blank line or overlay data must always separate an EXECUTE command  
from a NORMAL command, unless a form count is given for the  
EXECUTE.  
Commands  
4–77  
 
Page Number  
Purpose  
Defines where a page number is placed on a form and automatically  
increases the page number on each page.  
Mode  
CREATE  
Format  
PAGE; SR; SC  
PAGE  
The Page Number command; enter PAGE.  
SR  
Defines the starting row of the page number. Enter a  
value ranging from row 1 through one less than the  
length of the form. Character row or dot row is  
specified based on the Scale command (page 4–88), or  
use the CP.DP format (page 4–7).  
SC  
Defines the starting column of the page number. Enter  
a value ranging from column 1 through one less than  
the width of the form. Character column or dot column  
is specified based on the Scale command (page 4–88),  
or use the CP.DP format (page 4–7).  
If the SR or SC extends beyond the page boundaries,  
an Error 76 will occur in the Execute Form mode, and  
default page number SR SC values are used.  
Comments To begin automatically incrementing the page numbers, the starting page  
number must be specified during the Execute command.  
Example  
The following command places the page numbers at row 60 column 70 on  
the form.  
PAGE;60;70  
4–78  
Commands  
 
Paper  
Purpose  
Controls the printer cutter, print intensity, label sensor, page orientation  
(portrait/landscape), and print speed.  
Mode  
NORMAL, EXECUTE  
NOTE:  
Format  
More than one option may follow the paper command.  
(cc)PAPER [;option[ #]]  
NOTE:  
Not all options may be available with your printer. Consult your printer’s  
Setup Guide to determine which options are available. If an option is not  
available, the emulation will ignore the corresponding command.  
(cc)  
The Special Function Control Character.  
PAPER  
The PAPER command; enter PAPER. Refer to  
Table 4–3, on page 4–80.  
CUT #  
Sets the printer to cut a label after a specified number  
of labels. Enter CUT, a space, and a number in the  
range of 1 to 100 (1 implies no cutting).  
EJECT  
Prints all labels that are in the buffer. Enter EJECT.  
INTENSITY #  
Specifies the darkness of the dots. Enter INTENSITY,  
a space, and a number in the range of –10 to +10.  
LABELS #  
Specifies the label sensor. Enter LABELS, then a  
space, then a number: 0 = disable; 1 = Reflective  
Sensor; 2 = Transmissive Sensor.  
LANDSCAPE  
PORTRAIT  
Identifies the selected paper cassette in the landscape  
orientation. Enter LANDSCAPE. See ROTATE.  
Identifies the selected paper cassette in the portrait  
(default) orientation. Enter PORTRAIT. See  
ROTATE.  
Commands  
4–79  
 
ROTATE #  
SPEED  
Specifies the label rotation. Enter ROTATE, a space,  
and either 0 (default) or 180, for portrait, or 90 or 270,  
for landscape.  
Specifies the print speed in lines per minute. Enter  
SPEED, followed by a number in the range of 0 to  
9999.  
RIBSAVE #  
TEAR #  
Enables (or disables) the Ribbon Saver option. Replace  
# with 1 to enable or with 0 to disable the option.  
Sets the printer to present the label (so you can tear off  
a label). Enter TEAR, a space, and 0 or 1 (0 = no  
pause and 1 = tearoff).  
Comments You can use any or all Paper parameters, listed in any order, in a single  
Paper command. (Do not list any parameters on separate lines.) Parameters  
not specified or specified incorrectly retain the previously selected value.  
All Paper command parameters are reset to default values upon receiving a  
RESET command. Multiple paper commands within a single form will  
save the last paper command parameters specified.  
Changing orientation between Portrait and Landscape may cause  
previously defined forms to produce boundary error messages when the  
form is executed because width and height values are switched.  
Example  
Based on power-up printer defaults, the following command selects the  
landscape orientation.  
~PAPER;LANDSCAPE  
Table 4–3. Printer Speeds  
Printer Model  
Min. Speed (ips)  
Max. Speed (ips)  
Increments (ips)  
T3204  
T3304  
T3306  
T3308  
2
2
2
2
10  
8
0.5  
0.5  
0.5  
0.5  
8
9
4–80  
Commands  
 
PCX Logo  
Purpose  
Places the IGP/PGL in the Create Logo mode, where logos can be defined  
using the PCX file format.  
Mode  
NORMAL  
Format  
(cc)(LOGO;logoname;PCX[;DISK](T)  
<PCX raster data> (cc) RASTEREND [T]  
END(T)  
(cc)  
The Special Function Control Character.  
LOGO  
logoname  
The Logo command; enter LOGO.  
Enter a maximum of 12 alphanumeric characters for  
the name of the logo. (Refer to page 4–5 for a list of  
allowable Logo Name characters.) All future  
references to this logo (Delete Logo or Logo Call  
commands) must use this name. If a logo is defined  
with the same name as a logo already existing in  
memory, the newly defined logo will replace the  
existing logo.  
PCX  
The command denoting raster data in PCX format;  
enter PCX.  
DISK  
Optional parameter to store the logo in the IGP/PGL  
external memory modules. Enter DISK.  
T
Line terminator.  
PCX raster data  
Scanned data in PCX format; data must be black and  
white. Grey scales or color PCX files are currently not  
supported. Both uncompressed and compressed  
formats are supported.  
(cc)  
The Special Function Control Character.  
RASTEREND  
Denotes the end of the PCX raster data. Enter  
RASTEREND.  
END  
Terminates the PCX logo; enter END.  
Commands  
4–81  
 
Comments The size and number of raster image logos are bounded by printer memory.  
The logo call command in the Create Form mode brings the predefined  
logo into a form. The starting row and column parameters refer to the upper  
left corner of the logo grid. Once created, the logo is ready to be used in  
any form and will print at the size shown.  
Raster images may contain data that is interpreted by your host as control  
codes. This may affect the way the host sends data to the printer. Consult  
your host’s Setup Guide for sending binary data.  
Be careful when editing PCX output files because most TEXT editors insert  
carriage returns and line feeds. If a PCX file must be edited, use a binary or  
hex editor.  
4–82  
Commands  
 
Print File  
Purpose  
Prints files from the external memory module. Print File can be used to  
show the SETUP functions that exist.  
Mode  
NORMAL  
Format  
(cc)PRINT; filename  
(cc)  
The Special Function Control Character.  
The Print File command; enter PRINT.  
The filename to be printed.  
PRINT  
filename  
Comments Do not use wildcard characters because the Print File command will  
attempt to print any file in the external memory.  
Forms and logos stored in the external memory module are stored in PGL  
format, not in the format sent from the module; therefore, do not attempt to  
print .frm or .lgo files.  
Example  
Examples of how to print setup.ptx:  
~PRINT;SETUP.PTX  
Commands  
4–83  
 
Quiet  
Purpose  
Places the IGP/PGL in the Quiet mode, where all data passed to the  
LinePrinter+ Emulation is unaffected by IGP/PGL commands except for  
the LISTEN, SFON/SFOFF, IGON/IGOFF, and PTX_SETUP commands.  
Mode  
NORMAL  
(cc)QUIET  
Format  
(cc)  
The Special Function Control Character.  
QUIET  
The Quiet command; enter QUIET. The IGP/PGL  
remains in the quiet state until the Listen command is  
received.  
Comments In the Quiet mode IGP/PGL ignores all commands except LISTEN,  
SFON/SFOFF, IGON/IGOFF, and PTX_SETUP. All commands for the  
currently selected protocol in the LinePrinter+ will be interpreted. See the  
LinePrinter+ Users Manual for details.  
The IGP/PGL remains quiet until the LISTEN command (page 4–71)  
enables standard IGP/PGL operation. The Quiet command is ignored if the  
IGP/PGL is in the Execute Form mode.  
4–84  
Commands  
 
Reset  
Purpose  
Deletes all forms and logos from IGP/PGL memory. The Reset performs  
the following tasks:  
Prints any objects in the current page  
Selects the portrait orientation  
Deletes all forms and logos resident in memory  
Sets the font to the default Gothic 12 point/10CPI  
Releases all user–defined character mappings  
Runs the SETUP file if present  
Mode  
NORMAL, CREATE, or EXECUTE  
(cc)RESET  
Format  
(cc)  
The Special Function Control Character.  
RESET  
The Reset command; enter RESET.  
Comments This command deletes all forms and logos, including those input by other  
operators on shared IGP/PGL systems. To prevent the loss of information  
contained in the 2K–byte input buffer of the serial interface, the Reset  
command sequence must be the last item sent to the printer.  
IMPORTANT  
Wait several seconds after issuing a RESET command before sending  
another IGP/PGL command. The RESET process must be thoroughly  
completed before new IGP/PGL data is sent, or new data may be lost or  
damaged.  
Commands  
4–85  
 
Reverse Print  
Purpose  
Defines an area of the form where form elements are reverse printed (white  
on black).  
Mode  
CREATE  
Format  
REVERSE  
[DARK;] SR; SC; ER; EC  
STOP  
REVERSE  
The Reverse Printing command; enter REVERSE.  
DARK  
Optional parameter to select a denser black  
background. Enter DARK, or DA, to select the denser  
background. More information about dark printing is  
provided on page 4–10.  
SR  
SC  
ER  
Defines the starting row of the reverse print field. Enter  
a value ranging from row 1 through one less than the  
length of the form. Character row or dot row is  
specified based on the Scale command (page 4–88), or  
use the CP.DP format (page 4–7).  
Defines the starting column of the reverse print field.  
Enter a value ranging from column 1 through one less  
than the width of the form. Character column or dot  
column is specified based on the Scale command (page  
4–88), or use the CP.DP format (page 4–7).  
Defines the ending row of the reverse print field. Enter  
a value ranging from row 2 through the last row of the  
form. The ending row must be greater than the starting  
row. Character row or dot row is specified based on the  
Scale command (page 4–88), or use the CP.DP format  
(page 4–7).  
4–86  
Commands  
 
EC  
Defines the ending column of the reverse print field.  
Enter a value ranging from column 2 through the last  
column of the form. The ending column must be  
greater than the starting column. Character column or  
dot column is specified based on the Scale command  
(page 4–88), or use the CP.DP format (page 4–7).  
STOP  
Stop indicates the end of the REVERSE command;  
enter STOP, and the IGP/PGL will wait for a new  
command. If not entered, the IGP/PGL will expect  
another set of Reverse Print command parameters.  
Comments You can use reverse print with all form elements (alpha, lines, boxes, etc.).  
The IGP/PGL can also reverse print bar codes, but reverse printed bar  
codes are unreadable by bar code scanning devices.  
Commands  
4–87  
 
Scale  
Purpose  
Defines the vertical line spacing and the horizontal pitch of the form for  
data positioning specified by character row and column or dot row and  
column.  
Mode  
CREATE  
Format  
SCALE; DOT [;horz;vert] or SCALE; CHAR [;lpi] [;cpi]  
SCALE  
DOT  
The Scale command; enter SCALE.  
Specifies the dot scale. Enter DOT.  
Specifies the character scale. Enter CHAR.  
CHAR  
lpi  
The optional vertical line spacing parameter (in lines  
per inch) for character scaling. Enter: any integer  
value from 1 to the target DPI. The default is 6 lpi.  
cpi  
The optional horizontal pitch parameter (in characters  
per inch) for character scaling. Enter 10, 12, 13, 15, 17,  
or 20. The default is 10 cpi.  
horz/vert  
Gives resolution for the dot parameter. Default is 60  
dpi (horizontal) by 72 dpi (vertical).  
Comments If the character scale is selected, starting row/column or ending  
row/column parameters are specified by character row and column. The  
lines per inch (lpi) value for a character scale form can be set to any integer  
value from 1 to the target DPI. Characters per inch (cpi) horizontally can be  
either 10, 12, 13, 15, 17, or 20. For example, on a printer with a maximum  
print width of 80 columns, an 8–1/2 x 11–inch form at the 6 lpi 10 cpi  
default has 66 rows and 80 columns in the character scale. (Refer to your  
printer Setup Guide to determine your maximum print boundaries.)  
If the dot scale is selected, the parameters are specified in dot row and  
column. For example, based on a 60 dpi horizontal and 72 dpi vertical dot  
scale, a form of 8–1/2 x 11 inches has 792 rows (72 dpi x 11 inches) and  
510 columns (60 dpi x 8–1/2 inches), and a form of 8 x 11 inches has 792  
rows and 480 columns. Refer to Appendix C for more information about  
maximum values with other paper sizes.  
4–88  
Commands  
 
The default scale factor uses character row and column (6 lpi and 10 cpi).  
Anytime CP.DP format (page 4–7) is used, the scale assumes 6 lpi and 10  
cpi and a 60 x 72 dpi format.  
You can change the Scale at any time during forms creation by using either  
of the Scale commands. Elements designed before the scale change will  
print at the former scale, while those elements following the scale change  
will print at the current scale.  
NOTE:  
Scale affects data position, not the printed data itself. For example,  
alphanumeric data printed at 10 cpi will still print at 10 cpi after a Scale  
change; however, where the data is placed on the page is affected.  
Also, Scale affects line thickness if dot scale and horizontal/vertical scaling  
are given.  
Commands  
4–89  
 
Select Format  
Purpose  
Enables the IGP/PGL to ignore all host–generated paper movement  
commands (00–0F hex).  
Mode  
NORMAL, CREATE or EXECUTE  
(cc)SFON or (cc)SFOFF  
Format  
NOTE:  
A line terminator is not required in the Select Format Sequence.  
(cc)  
The Special Function Control Character.  
The Select Format On command. Enter SFON.  
Exits Select Format. Enter SFOFF.  
SFON  
SFOFF  
Comments During Select Format, you may enter the following IGP/PGL paper  
movement commands. All the commands must be entered in UPPERCASE.  
These commands can only be used with the Select Format command. If  
used at any other time, an error condition may result.  
Command  
(cc)CR  
Paper Movement Function  
Sends a carriage return (hex 0D)  
Sends a line feed (hex 0A)  
Sends a form feed (hex 0C)  
(cc)LF  
(cc)FF  
Although the Select Format command enables the IGP/PGL to ignore all  
host–generated paper movement commands, you can input IGP/PGL paper  
movement commands with Select Format on.  
SFON/SFOFF cannot be used during Ignore Sequence (page 4–65).  
Also, during the downloading of TIFF and PCX logos, the SFON/SFOFF  
commands are ignored, and, instead, the printer receives the raw data.  
4–90  
Commands  
 
Setup  
Purpose  
Automatically executes and loads IGP/PGL commands such as forms,  
logos, customized print environments, etc., from external memory to the  
printer whenever printer power is applied or when the RESET command  
(page 4–85) is sent.  
Mode  
NORMAL  
Format  
(cc)SETUP  
HOST DATA  
(cc)SETUPEND  
(cc)  
The Special Function Control Character.  
SETUP  
HOST DATA  
The Setup command; enter SETUP.  
Any IGP/PGL commands, form definitions, text, etc.  
to be stored and executed at power–up.  
SETUPEND  
Finishes storing host data and returns the printer to the  
NORMAL mode. Enter SETUPEND.  
Comments Because the RESET command causes the setup routine to be executed, the  
RESET command can not be in the SETUP information or else an infinite  
loop will occur.  
If IGP/PGL commands have not been added between the SETUP and  
SETUPEND commands, the SETUP.PTX file in the IGP/PGL external  
memory module is automatically deleted, and no IGP/PGL SETUP  
commands are executed upon printer power–up.  
NOTE: The SETUP.PTX is automatically created by the IGP/PGL when the  
~SETUPEND command is received. When the SETUP.PTX file is  
not in external memory, no extra IGP/PGL commands are  
performed on power up.  
Commands  
4–91  
 
TIFF Logo  
Purpose  
Places the IGP/PGL in the Create Logo mode, where logos can be defined  
using a Tagged Image File Format (TIFF).  
Mode  
NORMAL  
Format  
(cc)(LOGO;logoname;TIFF[;DISK](T)  
<TIFF raster data> (cc) RASTEREND [T]  
END(T)  
(cc)  
The Special Function Control Character.  
LOGO  
logoname  
The Logo command; enter LOGO.  
Enter a maximum of 12 alphanumeric characters for  
the name of the logo. (Refer to page 4–5 for a list of  
allowable Logo Name characters.) All future  
references to this logo (Delete Logo or Logo Call  
commands) must use this name. If a logo is defined  
with the same name as a logo already existing in  
memory, the newly defined logo will replace the  
existing logo.  
TIFF  
DISK  
T
The command denoting raster data in TIFF format;  
enter TIFF.  
Optional parameter to store the logo in the IGP/PGL  
external memory module. Enter DISK.  
Line terminator.  
TIFF raster data Scanned data in TIFF format; data must be black and  
white. Grey scales or color TIFF files are currently not  
supported. Both uncompressed and packed–bits  
compression formats are supported.  
(cc)  
The Special Function Control Character.  
RASTEREND  
Denotes the end of the TIFF raster data. Enter  
RASTEREND.  
END  
Terminates the TIFF logo; enter END.  
4–92  
Commands  
 
Comments The size and number of raster image logos are bounded by printer memory.  
The logo call command in the Create Form mode brings the predefined  
logo into a form. The starting row and column parameters refer to the upper  
left corner of the logo grid. Once created, the logo is ready to be used in  
any form and will print at the size shown.  
Raster images may contain data that is interpreted by your host as control  
codes. This may affect the way the host sends data to the printer. Consult  
your host’s Setup Guide for sending binary data.  
Be careful when editing TIFF output files because most TEXT editors  
insert carriage returns and line feeds. If a TIFF file must be edited, use a  
binary or hex editor.  
NOTE: Be careful sending TIFF data. The LOGO line must be terminated  
and then the TIFF data must follow immediately (with no extra  
CR/LF’s). Otherwise, improper operation will result.  
Commands  
4–93  
 
4–94  
Commands  
 
5
Bar Codes  
Chapter Contents  
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–2  
User–Defined Variable Bar Code Ratios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4  
PDF Character Sizes [PDF [;LOC] [;FONT] (T)] . . . . . . . . 5–20  
Code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–21  
Code 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–28  
Codabar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–35  
Code 128B and Code 128C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–42  
Code UCC–128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–51  
EAN 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–57  
EAN 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–64  
FIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–71  
Interleaved 2/5 (I–2/5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–78  
MSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–85  
PDF417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–92  
POSTNET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–98  
UPC–A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–104  
UPC–E and UPC–E0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–111  
Incremental Bar Code Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–120  
Incrementing Bar Code Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–121  
Incremental Bar Code Fixed Data Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–124  
Incremental Bar Code Dynamic Data Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–127  
Duplicating Incremental Bar Code Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–128  
Bar Codes  
5–1  
 
Overview  
A bar code is a graphic representation of alphanumeric characters. Bar codes  
are produced by entering bar code commands in the Create Form Mode. The  
IGP/PGL bar codes are listed below, in Table 5–1, with detailed bar code  
information provided on the referenced pages.  
All parameters must be separated by a semicolon (;) unless noted otherwise.  
Throughout this chapter, actual commands required for input are shown  
exactly as they must be entered, while all parameters associated with that  
command are shown in italics. Optional parameters are enclosed in brackets.  
Spaces are used only to visually separate the command parameters, but do  
not enter these spaces in your command.  
Table 5–1. Available Bar Codes  
SYMBOL  
BAR CODE  
Code 39  
MNEMONIC  
LENGTH  
Variable  
Variable  
Variable  
CODE SET  
PAGE NO.  
(Page 5–21)  
(Page 5–28)  
(Page 5–35)  
C39  
Alphanumeric  
Alphanumeric  
Alphanumeric  
Code 93  
CODE 93  
C128B  
Code 128 –  
Subset B  
PDF417  
PDF417  
C128C  
Variable  
Variable  
Alphanumeric  
Numeric  
(Page 5–35)  
(Page 5–35)  
Code 128 –  
Subset C  
Codabar  
CODABAR  
UCC–128  
Variable  
Alphanumeric  
Numeric  
(Page 5–35)  
(Page 5–51)  
Code UCC– 128  
19 or 20  
digits  
EAN 8  
EAN13  
EAN8  
7 digits  
Numeric  
Numeric  
(Page 5–57)  
(Page 5–64)  
EAN13  
12 digits  
FIM  
FIM  
I–2/5  
MSI  
N/A  
A, B, C, or D  
Numeric  
(Page 5–71)  
(Page 5–78)  
Interleaved 2/5  
MSI  
Variable  
13 or 14  
digits  
Variable  
(Page 5–85)  
5–2  
Bar Codes  
 
Table 5–1. Available Bar Codes (Continued)  
SYMBOL  
BAR CODE  
Postnet  
MNEMONIC  
LENGTH  
CODE SET  
PAGE NO.  
POSTNET  
5, 9 or 11  
digits  
Numeric  
(Page 5–98)  
UPC–A  
UPC–A  
Numeric  
11 or 6  
Numeric  
Numeric  
(Page 5–104)  
(Page 5–111)  
UPC–E and  
UPC–E0  
UPC–E  
UPC–E0  
Bar Codes  
5–3  
 
User–Defined Variable Bar Code Ratios [R[D]ratio]  
The user–defined variable ratio for bar codes is an optional parameter. The  
default ratios shown in Table 5–2 through Table 5–9 are overridden by the  
variable ratio feature. Four- and eight-digit ratios can be used, depending  
upon the bar code selected. Ratio data must be decimal values greater than 0.  
Enter R, followed by the actual bar code ratio. A colon must separate each  
element of the ratio.  
Like standard bar code ratios, user–defined ratios are also interpreted from  
left to right, measuring the size of each bar or space, in dot width, in the  
following pattern: narrow bar : narrow space : wide bar : wide space. Either  
enter four or eight values depending upon the bar code type.  
If the ‘D’ parameter is specified, the ratios are represented in printer dots  
instead of IGP PGL dots (60 x 72 dpi).  
NOTE: The IGP/PGL does not verify that ratio data creates acceptable  
wide/narrow element relationships for bar code readability. When  
designing unique ratio data, carefully plot wide and narrow ratios to  
conform to readable bar codes.  
Table 5–2. T3306 & T3308 Binary Bar Code Sizes (Normal & Inverted Drawing)  
5–4  
Bar Codes  
 
Format  
Size  
X1  
Avg. X Dim.  
16.7 mil  
16.7 mil  
13.3 mil  
13.3 mil  
13.3 mil  
10 mil  
Ratio  
2.8:1  
2.2:1  
2.5:1  
2.75:1  
2.25:1  
2.67:1  
2.33:1  
2.5:1  
2.8:1  
2.8:1  
2.8:1  
C 3/9,  
Codabar  
(Portrait Page)  
X1A  
X1B  
X1C  
X1D  
X1E  
X1F  
X1G  
X2  
10 mil  
6.7 mil  
33.3 mil  
50 mil  
X3  
X4  
66.7 mil  
Bar Codes  
5–5  
 
Table 5–2. T3306 & T3308 Binary Bar Code Sizes (Continued)  
Format  
Size  
X1  
Avg. X Dim.  
16.7 mil  
16.7 mil  
13.3 mil  
13.3 mil  
13.3 mil  
10 mil  
Ratio  
3:1  
C 3/9  
Codabar  
(Landscape Page)  
X1A  
X1B  
X1C  
X1D  
X1E  
X1F  
X1G  
X2  
2.1:1  
2.56:1  
2.71:1  
2.14:1  
2.71:1  
2.14:1  
2.6:1  
10 mil  
8.3 mil  
35 mil  
2.8:1  
X3  
50 mil  
2.8:1  
X4  
66.7 mil  
16.7 mil  
20 mil  
2.8:1  
I 2/5  
(Portrait Page)  
X1  
2.8:1  
X1A  
X1B  
X1C  
X1D  
X1E  
X1F  
X1G  
X2  
2.67:1  
2.2:1  
16.7 mil  
13.3 mil  
13.3 mil  
10 mil  
2.5:1  
2.75:1  
2.67:1  
2.33:1  
2.5:1  
10 mil  
6.7 mil  
36.7 mil  
30 mil  
2.27:1  
2.33:1  
2.5:1  
X2A  
X3  
53.3 mil  
70 mil  
X4  
2.43:1  
5–6  
Bar Codes  
 
I 25  
X1  
X1A  
X1B  
X1C  
X1D  
X1E  
X1F  
X1G  
X2  
16.7 mil  
20 mil  
2.8:1  
2.67:1  
2.2:1  
(Landscape Page)  
16.7 mil  
13.3 mil  
13.3 mil  
10 mil  
2.5:1  
2.75:1  
2.67:1  
2.33:1  
2.6:1  
10 mil  
6.7 mil  
36.7 mil  
30 mil  
2.27:1  
2.33:1  
2.5:1  
X2A  
X3  
53.3 mil  
70 mil  
X4  
2.43:1  
Bar Codes  
5–7  
 
Table 5–2. T3306 & T3308 Binary Bar Code Sizes (Continued)  
Format  
Size  
X1  
X2  
X3  
X4  
X1  
X2  
X3  
X4  
Avg. X Dim.  
16.7 mil  
23.3 mil  
33.3 mil  
40 mil  
Ratio  
2.8:1  
MSI  
(Portrait Page)  
2.57:1  
2.3:1  
2.33:1  
2.8:1  
MSI  
16.7 mil  
23.3 mil  
33.3 mil  
40 mil  
(Landscape Page)  
2.57:1  
2.3:1  
2.33:1  
Table 5–3. T3306 & T3308 Binary Bar Code Sizes (CW & CCW Drawing)  
Format  
Size  
X1  
Avg. X Dim.  
20 mil  
Ratio  
2.5:1  
C 3/9  
Codabar  
(Portrait Page)  
X1A  
X1B  
X1C  
X1D  
X1E  
X1F  
X1G  
X2  
13.3 mil  
20 mil  
2.75:1  
2.83:1  
2.71:1  
2.14:1  
2.71:1  
2.14:1  
2.6:1  
13.3 mil  
13.3 mil  
10 mil  
10 mil  
8.3 mil  
26.7 mil  
40 mil  
2.88:1  
2.92:1  
2.94:1  
X3  
X4  
53.3 mil  
5–8  
Bar Codes  
 
C 3/9  
Codabar  
(Landscape Page)  
X1  
X1A  
X1B  
X1C  
X1D  
X1E  
X1F  
X1G  
X2  
20 mil  
13.3 mil  
20 mil  
2.5:1  
2.75:1  
2.83:1  
2.75:1  
2.25:1  
2.67:1  
2.33:1  
2.5:1  
13.3 mil  
13.3 mil  
10 mil  
10 mil  
6.7 mil  
26.7 mil  
40 mil  
2.88:1  
2.92:1  
2.94:1  
X3  
X4  
53.3 mil  
Table 5–3. T3306 & T3308 Binary Bar Code Sizes (Continued)  
Format  
Size  
X1  
Avg. X Dim.  
20 mil  
Ratio  
2.5:1  
I 2/5  
(Portrait Page)  
X1A  
X1B  
X1C  
X1D  
X1E  
X1F  
X1G  
X2  
13.3 mil  
20 mil  
2.75:1  
2.83:1  
2.71:1  
2.14:1  
2.71:1  
2.14:1  
2.6:1  
13.3 mil  
13.3 mil  
10 mil  
10 mil  
8.3 mil  
26.7 mil  
26.7 mil  
40 mil  
2.88:1  
2.13:1  
2.92:1  
2.94:1  
X2A  
X3  
X4  
53.3 mil  
Bar Codes  
5–9  
 
I 25  
X1  
X1A  
X1B  
X1C  
X1D  
X1E  
X1F  
X1G  
X2  
20 mil  
13.3 mil  
20 mil  
2.5:1  
2.75:1  
2.83:1  
2.75:1  
2.25:1  
2.67:1  
2.33:1  
2.5:1  
(Landscape Page)  
13.3 mil  
13.3 mil  
10 mil  
10 mil  
6.7 mil  
26.7 mil  
26.7 mil  
40 mil  
2.88:1  
2.13:1  
2.92:1  
2.94:1  
2.8:1  
X2A  
X3  
X4  
53.3 mil  
16.7 mil  
23.3 mil  
33.3 mil  
40 mil  
MSI  
(Portrait Page)  
X1  
X2  
2.57:1  
2.3:1  
X3  
X4  
2.33:1  
2.8:1  
MSI  
X1  
16.7 mil  
23.3 mil  
33.3 mil  
40 mil  
(Landscape Page)  
X2  
2.57:1  
2.3:1  
X3  
X4  
2.33:1  
5–10  
Bar Codes  
 
Table 5–4. T3306 & T3308 4-Element Bar Code Sizes (Normal & Inverted Drawing)  
Format  
Size  
Avg. X Dim.  
Ratio  
UPC  
EAN  
X1  
13.3 mil  
(Mag: 1.03)  
4:3:2:1  
(Portrait Page)  
X1.5  
X0.5  
X1  
16.7 mil  
(Mag: 1.28)  
4:3:2:1  
4:3:2:1  
4:3:2:1  
4:3:2:1  
4:3:2:1  
11.7 mil  
(Mag: 0.90)  
UPC  
EAN  
(Landscape Page)  
13.3 mil  
(Mag: 1.03)  
X1.5  
X0.5  
16.7 mil  
(Mag: 1.28)  
11.7 mil  
(Mag: 0.90)  
C128  
C93  
(Portrait Page)  
X1  
X1.5  
X1A  
X2  
16.7  
23.3  
13.3  
33.3  
50  
4:3:2:1  
4:3:2:1  
4:3:2:1  
4:3:2:1  
4:3:2:1  
4:3:2:1  
4:3:2:1  
4:3:2:1  
4:3:2:1  
4:3:2:1  
4:3:2:1  
4:3:2:1  
4:3:2:1  
4:3:2:1  
X3  
X4  
66.7  
83.3  
16.7  
23.3  
13.3  
33.3  
50  
X5  
C128  
C93  
(Landscape Page)  
X1  
X1.5  
X1A  
X2  
X3  
X4  
66.7  
83.3  
X5  
Table 5–5. T3306 & T3308 4-Element Bar Code Sizes (CW & CCW Drawing)  
Format  
Size  
Avg. X Dim.  
Ratio  
UPC  
EAN  
X1  
13.3 mil  
(Mag: 1.03)  
4:3:2:1  
(Portrait Page)  
X1.5  
X0.5  
16.7 mil  
(Mag: 1.28)  
4:3:2:1  
4:3:2:1  
11.7 mil  
(Mag: 0.90)  
Bar Codes  
5–11  
 
Table 5–5. T3306 & T3308 4-Element Bar Code Sizes (Continued)  
Format  
Size  
Avg. X Dim.  
Ratio  
UPC  
EAN  
X1  
13.3 mil  
(Mag: 1.03)  
4:3:2:1  
(Landscape Page)  
X1.5  
X0.5  
16.7 mil  
(Mag: 1.28)  
4:3:2:1  
4:3:2:1  
11.7 mil  
(Mag: 0.90)  
C128  
C93  
(Portrait Page)  
X1  
X1.5  
X1A  
X2  
13.3 mil  
20 mil  
4:3:2:1  
4:3:2:1  
4:3:2:1  
4:3:2:1  
4:3:2:1  
4:3:2:1  
4:3:2:1  
4:3:2:1  
4:3:2:1  
4:3:2:1  
4:3:2:1  
4:3:2:1  
4:3:2:1  
4:3:2:1  
10 mil  
26.7 mil  
40 mil  
X3  
X4  
53.3 mil  
80 mil  
X5  
C128  
C93  
(Landscape Page)  
X1  
13.3 mil  
20 mil  
X1.5  
X1A  
X2  
10 mil  
26.7 mil  
40 mil  
X3  
X4  
53.3 mil  
80 mil  
X5  
Table 5–6. T3204 & T3304 Binary Bar Code Sizes (Normal & Inverted Drawing)  
5–12  
Bar Codes  
 
Format  
Size  
X1  
Avg. X Dim.  
16.7 mil  
16.7 mil  
13.3 mil  
13.3 mil  
13.3 mil  
10 mil  
Ratio  
2.67:1  
2.33:1  
2.6:1  
2.5:1  
2:1  
C 3/9,  
Codabar  
(Portrait Page)  
X1A  
X1B  
X1C  
X1D  
X1E  
X1F  
X1G  
X2  
2.5:1  
2.5:1  
3:1  
10 mil  
6.7 mil  
33.3 mil  
50 mil  
2.7:1  
2.8:1  
2.8:1  
X3  
X4  
66.7 mil  
Table 5–6. T3204 & T3304 Binary Bar Code Sizes (Continued)  
Format  
Size  
X1  
Avg. X Dim.  
16.7 mil  
16.7 mil  
13.3 mil  
13.3 mil  
13.3 mil  
10 mil  
Ratio  
2.67:1  
2.33:1  
2.6:1  
2.5:1  
2:1  
C 3/9,  
Codabar  
(Landscape Page)  
X1A  
X1B  
X1C  
X1D  
X1E  
X1F  
X1G  
X2  
2.5:1  
2.5:1  
2:1  
10 mil  
8.3 mil  
35 mil  
2.7:1  
2.8:1  
2.8:1  
X3  
50 mil  
X4  
66.7 mil  
Bar Codes  
5–13  
 
I 2/5  
(Portrait Page)  
X1  
X1A  
X1B  
X1C  
X1D  
X1E  
X1F  
X1G  
X2  
16.7 mil  
20 mil  
2.67:1  
2.75:1  
2.33:1  
2.5:1  
2:1  
16.7 mil  
13.3 mil  
13.3 mil  
10 mil  
2.5:1  
2.5:1  
3:1  
10 mil  
6.7 mil  
36.7 mil  
30 mil  
2.2:1  
2.67:1  
2.43:1  
2.36:1  
2.67:1  
2.75:1  
2.33:1  
2.5:1  
2:1  
X2A  
X3  
53.3 mil  
70 mil  
X4  
I 2/5  
(Landscape Page)  
X1  
16.7 mil  
20 mil  
X1A  
X1B  
X1C  
X1D  
X1E  
X1F  
X1G  
X2  
16.7 mil  
13.3 mil  
13.3 mil  
10 mil  
2.5:1  
2.5:1  
2:1  
10 mil  
6.7 mil  
36.7 mil  
30 mil  
2.2:1  
2.67:1  
2.43:1  
2.36:1  
X2A  
X3  
53.3 mil  
70 mil  
X4  
Table 5–6. T3204 & T3304 Binary Bar Code Sizes (Continued)  
Format  
Size  
X1  
X2  
X3  
X4  
Avg. X Dim.  
16.7 mil  
23.3 mil  
33.3 mil  
40 mil  
Ratio  
2.67:1  
2.56:1  
2.23:1  
2.25:1  
MSI  
(Portrait Page)  
5–14  
Bar Codes  
 
MSI  
X1  
X2  
X3  
X4  
16.7 mil  
23.3 mil  
33.3 mil  
40 mil  
2.67:1  
2.56:1  
2.23:1  
2.25:1  
(Landscape Page)  
Table 5–7. T3204 & T3304 Binary Bar Code Sizes (CW & CCW Drawing)  
Format  
Size  
X1  
Avg. X Dim.  
20 mil  
Ratio  
2.5:1  
2.5:1  
2.75:1  
2.5:1  
2:1  
C 3/9,  
Codabar  
(Portrait Page)  
X1A  
X1B  
X1C  
X1D  
X1E  
X1F  
X1G  
X2  
13.3 mil  
20 mil  
13.3 mil  
13.3 mil  
10 mil  
2.5:1  
2:1  
10 mil  
8.3 mil  
26.7 mil  
40 mil  
2.33:1  
2.8:1  
2.88:1  
2.9:1  
2.5:1  
2.5:1  
2.75:1  
2.5:1  
2:1  
X3  
X4  
53.3 mil  
20 mil  
C 3/9,  
Codabar  
(Landscape Page)  
X1  
X1A  
X1B  
X1C  
X1D  
X1E  
X1F  
X1G  
X2  
13.3 mil  
20 mil  
13.3 mil  
13.3 mil  
10 mil  
2.5:1  
2:1  
10 mil  
6.7 mil  
26.7 mil  
40 mil  
2:1  
2.8:1  
2.88:1  
2.9:1  
X3  
X4  
53.3 mil  
Table 5–7. T3204 & T3304 Binary Bar Code Sizes (Continued)  
Bar Codes  
5–15  
 
Format  
Size  
X1  
Avg. X Dim.  
20 mil  
Ratio  
2.5:1  
2.5:1  
2.75:1  
2.5:1  
2:1  
I 2/5  
(Portrait Page)  
X1A  
X1B  
X1C  
X1D  
X1E  
X1F  
X1G  
X2  
13.3 mil  
20 mil  
13.3 mil  
13.3 mil  
10 mil  
2.5:1  
2:1  
10 mil  
8.3 mil  
26.7 mil  
26.7 mil  
40 mil  
2.33:1  
2.8:1  
2:1  
X2A  
X3  
2.88:1  
2.9:1  
2.5:1  
2.5:1  
2.75:1  
2.5:1  
2:1  
X4  
53.3 mil  
20 mil  
I 2/5  
(Landscape Page)  
X1  
X1A  
X1B  
X1C  
X1D  
X1E  
X1F  
X1G  
X2  
13.3 mil  
20 mil  
13.3 mil  
13.3 mil  
10 mil  
2.5:1  
2:1  
10 mil  
6.7 mil  
26.7 mil  
26.7 mil  
40 mil  
2:1  
2.8:1  
2:1  
X2A  
X3  
2.88:1  
2.9:1  
2.66:1  
2.56:1  
2.23:1  
2.25:1  
2.66:1  
2.56:1  
2.23:1  
2.25:1  
X4  
53.3 mil  
16.7 mil  
23.3 mil  
33.3 mil  
40 mil  
MSI  
(Portrait Page)  
X1  
X2  
X3  
X4  
MSI  
X1  
16.7 mil  
23.3 mil  
33.3 mil  
40 mil  
(Landscape Page)  
X2  
X3  
X4  
5–16  
Bar Codes  
 
Table 5–8. T3204 & T3304 4-Element Bar Code Sizes (Normal & Inverted Drawing)  
Format  
Size  
Avg. X Dim.  
Ratio  
UPC  
EAN  
X1  
13.3 mil  
(Mag: 1.03)  
4:3:2:1  
(Portrait Page)  
X1.5  
X0.5  
X1  
16.7 mil  
(Mag: 1.28)  
4:3:2:1  
4:3:2:1  
4:3:2:1  
4:3:2:1  
4:3:2:1  
11.7 mil  
(Mag: 0.90)  
UPC  
EAN  
(Landscape Page)  
13.3 mil  
(Mag: 1.03)  
X1.5  
X0.5  
16.7 mil  
(Mag: 1.28)  
11.7 mil  
(Mag: 0.90)  
C128  
C93  
(Portrait Page)  
X1  
X1.5  
X1A  
X2  
16.7  
23.3  
13.3  
33.3  
50  
4:3:2:1  
4:3:2:1  
4:3:2:1  
4:3:2:1  
4:3:2:1  
4:3:2:1  
4:3:2:1  
4:3:2:1  
4:3:2:1  
4:3:2:1  
4:3:2:1  
4:3:2:1  
4:3:2:1  
4:3:2:1  
X3  
X4  
66.7  
83.3  
16.7  
23.3  
13.3  
33.3  
50  
X5  
C128  
C93  
(Landscape Page)  
X1  
X1.5  
X1A  
X2  
X3  
X4  
66.7  
83.3  
X5  
Table 5–9. T3204 & T3304 4-Element Bar Code Sizes (CW & CCW Drawing)  
Format  
Size  
Avg. X Dim.  
Ratio  
UPC  
EAN  
X1  
13.3 mil  
(Mag: 1.03)  
4:3:2:1  
(Portrait Page)  
X1.5  
X0.5  
16.7 mil  
(Mag: 1.28)  
4:3:2:1  
4:3:2:1  
11.7 mil  
(Mag: 0.90)  
Bar Codes  
5–17  
 
Table 5–9. T3204 & T3304 4-Element Bar Code Sizes (Continued)  
Format  
Size  
Avg. X Dim.  
Ratio  
UPC  
EAN  
X1  
13.3 mil  
(Mag: 1.03)  
4:3:2:1  
(Landscape Page)  
X1.5  
X0.5  
16.7 mil  
(Mag: 1.28)  
4:3:2:1  
4:3:2:1  
11.7 mil  
(Mag: 0.90)  
C128  
C93  
(Portrait Page)  
X1  
X1.5  
X1A  
X2  
13.3 mil  
20 mil  
4:3:2:1  
4:3:2:1  
4:3:2:1  
4:3:2:1  
4:3:2:1  
4:3:2:1  
4:3:2:1  
4:3:2:1  
4:3:2:1  
4:3:2:1  
4:3:2:1  
4:3:2:1  
4:3:2:1  
4:3:2:1  
10 mil  
26.7 mil  
40 mil  
X3  
X4  
53.3 mil  
80 mil  
X5  
C128  
C93  
(Landscape Page)  
X1  
13.3 mil  
20 mil  
X1.5  
X1A  
X2  
10 mil  
26.7 mil  
40 mil  
X3  
X4  
53.3 mil  
80 mil  
X5  
5–18  
Bar Codes  
 
Variable Ratio Sample  
~CREATE;TEST  
(Enters Create Form mode)  
(Alpha command)  
SCALE;CHAR  
ALPHA  
2;5;1;1;1;*Std. Ratio*  
STOP  
(Ends Alpha command)  
(Bar code command)  
BARCODE  
C3/9;X1;H7;3;5  
“CODE39”  
PDF;B;N  
(Printable data field)  
STOP  
(Ends bar code command)  
/
/
/
/
/
ALPHA  
(Alpha command)  
2;30;1;1;*Var. Ratio*  
STOP  
(Ends bar code command)  
(Bar code command)  
BARCODE  
C3/9;XRD2:2:5:5;H7;3;30  
“CODE39”  
PDF;B;N  
(Printable data field)  
STOP  
(Ends bar code command)  
(Terminates Create Form mode)  
(Prints the form)  
END  
~EXECUTE;TEST;1  
Bar Codes  
5–19  
 
PDF Character Sizes [PDF [;LOC] [;FONT] (T)]  
UPC and EAN  
For UPC and EAN bar codes, a smaller Letter Gothic font will be substituted  
for OCR–A or OCR–B when the bar code symbol is not large enough to  
accommodate a 10 CPI font.  
Other Bar Codes  
For all other bar codes, OCR–A and OCR–B will print at 10 CPI. However,  
when using the Normal font, the PDF will be automatically sized to fit the  
length of the bar code symbol, if necessary.  
NOTE: The DARK parameter is ignored for all bar codes.  
5–20  
Bar Codes  
 
Code 39  
The Code 39 structure is shown in Figure 5–1 and described on the following  
pages.  
QUIET  
ZONE  
QUIET  
ZONE  
SR, SC  
POSITION  
SR, SC  
POSITION  
STOP  
CODE  
STOP  
CODE  
OPTIONAL  
CHECK  
DIGIT  
OPTIONAL  
CHECK  
DIGIT  
DATA  
FIELD  
DATA  
FIELD  
OPTIONAL  
READABLE  
DATA  
OPTIONAL  
READABLE  
DATA  
FIELD  
FIELD  
LOWER  
GUARD  
BAND  
START  
CODE  
START  
CODE  
LOWER  
GUARD  
BAND  
UPPER  
GUARD  
BAND  
UPPER  
GUARD  
BAND  
QUIET  
ZONE  
QUIET  
ZONE  
HEIGHT  
HEIGHT  
OPTIONAL  
CHECK DIGIT  
SR, SC  
POSITION  
OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD  
UPPER GUARD BAND  
HEIGHT  
QUIET START  
STOP QUIET  
CODE ZONE  
DATA FIELD  
ZONE  
CODE  
LOWER GUARD BAND  
OPTIONAL  
CHECK DIGIT  
SR, SC  
POSITION  
UPPER GUARD BAND  
DATA FIELD  
QUIET START  
STOP QUIET  
CODE ZONE  
HEIGHT  
ZONE  
CODE  
LOWER GUARD BAND  
OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD  
Figure 5–1. Code 39 Structure  
Bar Codes  
5–21  
 
Quiet Zone  
Both ends of the bar code structure require blank quiet zones. The quiet  
zones must be at least 0.25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure  
accurate reading of the start/stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes  
from overlapping. Be sure to provide sufficient space on the form for the  
quiet zones.  
Start/Stop Codes  
The start/stop code is a unique character identifying the leading and trailing  
end of the bar code. The start/stop code is automatically produced with  
each bar code. The start/stop code structure permits bidirectional bar code  
scanning.  
Data Field  
The bar code symbol uses a series of wide and narrow bars and spaces to  
represent standard alphanumeric characters. Each wide or narrow bar or  
space is one element; each character in the data field has nine elements.  
The structure is three wide elements (bars or spaces) out of the nine total  
elements which compose one character.  
Readable Data  
The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the  
bar code data. It can be printed above or below the bar code symbol.  
Check Digit  
The optional modulo–43 check digit can be inserted into the bar code to  
verify accurate scanning.  
5–22  
Bar Codes  
 
Code 39 Command Format  
NOTE: Although commonly referred to as Code “39,” you must enter the  
command as “C3/9” (including the slash) during IGP/PGL input.  
BARCODE  
C3/9 [CD]; [VSCAN;] [MAG;] [Hn[.m];] [BFn;L;] [DARK;] SR; SC  
[(D)data field(D)]  
[PDF [;LOC] [;FONT]]  
STOP  
BARCODE  
C3/9 CD  
The Bar Code command; enter BARCODE.  
Designates bar code type C39; enter C3/9. To calculate  
and plot the optional modulo–43 check digit with the  
bar code symbol automatically, enter CD.  
VSCAN  
Optional parameter to orient the bar code structure  
vertically. To select a vertical bar code, enter VSCAN.  
If VSCAN is not entered, the bar code is oriented  
horizontally.  
MAG  
Optional parameter to magnify (horizontally expand)  
the bar code symbol. The magnification default value  
is X1. As required for scanning, enter a magnification  
value to increase the magnification. Increasing the  
magnification adjusts printed character density.  
You can also use XR or XRD as defined on page 5–4.  
Hn[.m]  
Optional parameter to adjust the overall height  
(vertical expansion) of the bar code symbol (including  
the upper and lower 0.1– inch guard bands and any  
human readable data). Height adjustments are made in  
0.1–inch increments plus dots; enter H and a value  
from 4 to 99 to select height adjustments from 0.4 to  
9.9 inches. The default value is 0.9 inch.  
.m is an additional number of dots for the bar code  
height. (Dots are in the current dot scale.)  
Bar Codes  
5–23  
 
BFn;L  
Optional parameters for assigning a dynamic bar code  
data field location on a form and for designating the  
length of the data field. With these parameters, the  
actual data for the bar code data field is dynamically  
provided during the Execute Form Mode; the data is  
not specified during the Create Form Mode. To use this  
field, perform the following steps:  
a. Enter BF.  
b. Replace n with a number ranging from 1 to 255  
to identify the bar code field. The SR and SC  
parameters specify the exact location of the bar  
code field identified by n.  
c. Replace L with a number equaling the total  
number of characters in the field. (The actual  
data provided dynamically during the Execute  
Form Mode can be less than L.)  
d. The information for the data field is entered  
dynamically during the Execute Form Mode.  
(Refer to “Execute Form: Dynamic Bar Code  
Data” on page 4–55 in the “Commands”  
chapter.) Do not use the data field parameter to  
enter data when the BFn;L parameters are used.  
However, refer to the data field description for  
available characters.  
DARK  
Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar  
codes. Enter DARK. Refer to Dark Printing on page  
4–10 for more information.  
SR  
Defines the starting row for the bar code. Enter a value  
ranging from row 1 to one less than the length of the  
form. Character row or dot row is specified based on  
the Scale command (page 4–88), or use the CP.DP  
format (page 4–7).  
5–24  
Bar Codes  
 
SC  
Defines the starting column of the bar code. Enter a  
value ranging from column 1 to one less than the width  
of the form. Character column or dot column is  
specified based on the Scale command (page 4–88), or  
use the CP.DP format (page 4–7).  
D
The printable character (delimiter) identifying the start  
and finish of the data field. Enter any printable  
character other than a slash (/), the SFCC, or a  
character used within the data. The same character  
must be used at both ends of the data field, but it is not  
printed with the data.  
data field  
Contains the bar code characters. A null data field (no  
characters) is permitted. The length of the data field is  
variable; however, the maximum length is usually  
limited to 32 characters to minimize potential reading  
errors.  
PDF  
Optional parameter to enable printing of the human  
readable data field. Enter PDF to print the data field. If  
the parameter is not used, the human readable data will  
not print. This parameter is not allowed if a null data  
field is specified.  
LOC  
Optional parameter to identify the location of the  
printable data field. The default value is B, locating the  
human readable data below the bar code. A locates the  
printable data field above bar code. To compensate for  
printing the 0.1–inch high data, the height of the bar  
code body is reduced 0.1 inch.  
FONT  
Optional parameter to select the font for the human  
readable data field. The default value is N, selecting  
the normal ASCII 10 cpi font. Enter O to select the  
OCR–A 10 cpi font; enter X to select the OCR–B 10  
cpi type font.  
STOP  
Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP/PGL  
continues in the Create Form Mode. Enter STOP. If  
STOP is not entered, an error message results.  
Bar Codes  
5–25  
 
Table 5–10. Code 39 Character Set  
C= Character  
H = Hex  
C
H
C
H
C
H
C
H
C
H
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
4A  
K
L
4B  
4C  
4D  
4E  
4F  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
U
V
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
5A  
20  
24  
25  
2B  
.
2D  
2E  
2F  
M
N
O
P
W
X
/
Y
Z
Q
R
S
Space  
$
%
J
T
+
Code 39 Example  
Figure 5–2 illustrates a horizontal and vertical Code 39 bar code generated  
by the following program:  
~CREATE;C39  
BARCODE  
C3/9;DARK;40;15  
*SAMPLE C3/9*  
PDF  
(Enter Create Form Mode)  
(Bar Code Command)  
(Dark Code 39 at SR 40, SC 15)  
(Data Field)  
(Printable Data Field)  
STOP  
(Ends Bar Code Command)  
(New Bar Code Command)  
BARCODE  
C3/9;VSCAN;H14;DARK;27;58  
(Vert Dark Code 39, H 1.4, at SR 27, SC 58)  
*SAMPLE C3/9*  
PDF  
(Data Field)  
(Printable Data Field)  
STOP  
(Ends Bar Code Command)  
(Terminates Create Form Mode)  
(Execute the form, form count of 1)  
END  
~EXECUTE;C39;1  
5–26  
Bar Codes  
 
SC 58  
Figure 5–2. Sample Code 39 Bar Codes  
Bar Codes  
5–27  
 
Code 93  
The Code 93 structure is shown in Figure 5–3 and described on the following  
pages.  
QUIET  
ZONE  
QUIET  
ZONE  
SR, SC  
POSITION  
SR, SC  
POSITION  
STOP  
CODE  
STOP  
CODE  
CHECK  
DIGIT  
FIELD  
CHECK  
DIGIT  
FIELD  
DATA  
FIELD  
DATA  
FIELD  
OPTIONAL  
READABLE  
DATA  
OPTIONAL  
READABLE  
DATA  
FIELD  
FIELD  
LOWER  
GUARD  
BAND  
START  
CODE  
START  
CODE  
LOWER  
GUARD  
BAND  
UPPER  
GUARD  
BAND  
UPPER  
GUARD  
BAND  
QUIET  
ZONE  
QUIET  
ZONE  
HEIGHT  
HEIGHT  
CHECK DIGIT  
FIELD  
SR, SC  
POSITION  
OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD  
UPPER GUARD BAND  
HEIGHT  
QUIET START  
STOP QUIET  
CODE ZONE  
DATA FIELD  
ZONE  
CODE  
LOWER GUARD BAND  
CHECK DIGIT  
FIELD  
SR, SC  
POSITION  
UPPER GUARD BAND  
DATA FIELD  
QUIET START  
STOP QUIET  
CODE ZONE  
HEIGHT  
ZONE  
CODE  
LOWER GUARD BAND  
OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD  
Figure 5–3. Code 93 Structure  
5–28  
Bar Codes  
 
Quiet Zone  
Both ends of the bar code structure require blank quiet zones. The quiet  
zones must be at least 0.25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure  
accurate reading of the start/stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes  
from overlapping. Be sure to provide sufficient space on the form for the  
quiet zones.  
Start/Stop Codes  
The start/stop codes identify the leading and trailing end of the bar code.  
Code 93 Data Field  
The bar code symbol uses a series of varying width bars and spaces to  
represent an extensive character set. The bars and spaces vary in width  
from one to four modules. Each character consists of three bars and three  
spaces that total 11 modules.  
Readable Data  
The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the  
bar code data. It can be printed above or below the bar code symbol.  
Check Digit  
The modulo–103 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the  
bar code symbol. The check digit verifies accurate scanning. The start code  
is included in the check digit algorithm.  
Bar Codes  
5–29  
 
Code 93 Command Format  
BARCODE  
CODE93[;VSCAN][;MAG][Hn[.m]][;BFn;L][;DARK];SR;SC(T)  
[(D)<data field>(D)(T)]  
[PDF[;LOC][;FONT](T)]  
STOP  
BARCODE  
CODE93  
VSCAN  
The Bar Code command; enter BARCODE.  
Designates bar code type Code 93; enter CODE93.  
Optional parameter to orient the bar code structure  
vertically. To select a vertical bar code, enter VSCAN.  
If VSCAN is not entered, the bar code is oriented  
horizontally.  
MAG  
Optional parameter to magnify (horizontally expand)  
the bar code symbol. The magnification default value  
is X1. Increasing the magnification adjusts printed  
character density.  
You can also use XR or XRD as defined on page 5–4.  
(You must specify 8 digits for MAG for variable ratio.)  
Hn[.m]  
Optional parameter to adjust the overall height  
(vertical expansion) of the bar code symbol (including  
the upper and lower 0.1–inch guard bands and any  
human readable data).  
Height adjustments are made in 0.1–inch increments;  
enter H and a value from 4 to 99 to select height  
adjustments from 0.4 to 9.9 inches. The default value is  
0.9 inch.  
.m is an additional number of dots for the bar code  
height. (Dots are in the current dot scale.)  
BFn;L  
Optional parameters for assigning a dynamic bar code  
data field location on a form and for designating the  
length of the data field. With these parameters, the  
actual data for the bar code data field is dynamically  
provided during the Execute Form Mode; the data is  
not specified during the Create Form Mode.  
5–30  
Bar Codes  
 
To use this field, perform the following steps:  
a. Enter BF.  
b. Replace n with a number ranging from 1 to 255  
to identify the bar code field. The SR and SC  
parameters specify the exact location of the bar  
code field identified by n.  
c. Replace L with a number equaling the total  
number of characters in the field. (The actual  
data provided dynamically during the Execute  
Form Mode can be less than L.)  
d. The information for the data field is entered  
dynamically during the Execute Form Mode.  
(Refer to “Execute Form: Dynamic Bar Code  
Data” on page 4–55 in the “Commands”  
chapter.) Do not use the data field parameter to  
enter data when the BFn;L parameters are used.  
However, refer to the data field description for  
available characters.  
DARK  
SR  
Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar  
codes. Enter DARK. Refer to “Dark Printing” on page  
4–10 for more information.  
Defines the starting row for the bar code. Enter a value  
ranging from row 1 to one less than the length of the  
form. Character row or dot row is specified based on  
the Scale command (page 4–88), or use the CP.DP  
format (page 4–7).  
SC  
Defines the starting column of the bar code. Enter a  
value ranging from column 1 to one less than the width  
of the form. Character column or dot column is  
specified based on the Scale command (page 4–88), or  
use the CP.DP format (page 4–7).  
D
The printable character (delimiter) identifying the start  
and finish of the data field. Enter any printable  
character other than a slash (/), the SFCC, or a  
character used within the data.  
Bar Codes  
5–31  
 
The same character must be used at both ends of the  
data field, but it will not print with the data.  
data field  
Enter the data for the bar code. A null data field (no  
characters) is permitted. The length of the data field is  
variable; however, the maximum length is usually  
limited to 32 characters to minimize potential reading  
errors.  
PDF  
Optional parameter to enable printing of the human  
readable data field. Enter PDF to print the data field. If  
the parameter is not used, the human readable data will  
not print. This parameter is not allowed if a null data  
field was specified.  
LOC  
Optional parameter to identify the location of the  
printable data field. The default value is B, locating the  
human readable data below the bar code. A locates the  
printable data field above bar code. To compensate for  
printing the 0.1–inch high data, the height of the bar  
code body is reduced 0.1 inch.  
FONT  
Optional parameter to select the font for the human  
readable data field. The default value, N, selects the  
normal ASCII 10 cpi font. Enter O to select the  
OCR–A 10 cpi font; enter X to select the OCR–B 10  
cpi type font.  
STOP  
Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP/PGL  
continues in the Create Form Mode. Enter STOP. If  
STOP is not entered, an error message results.  
5–32  
Bar Codes  
 
Table 5–11. Code 93 Character Set  
Character  
Hex  
0
Character  
Hex  
51  
0
Q
1
1
R
52  
2
2
S
53  
3
3
T
54  
4
4
U
55  
5
5
V
56  
6
6
W
57  
7
7
X
58  
8
8
Y
59  
9
9
Z
5A  
2D  
2E  
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
4A  
4B  
4C  
4D  
4E  
4F  
50  
.
SPACE  
$
20  
3F  
/
2F  
+
2B  
25  
%
S1  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
S2  
J
S3  
K
L
M
N
O
P
S4  
Start  
Stop  
Bar Codes  
5–33  
 
Code 93 Example  
The illustration below shows a horizontal Code 93 bar code generated by the  
following program:  
~CREATE;TEST;288  
SCALE;CHAR  
BARCODE  
(Enters Create Form mode)  
(Bar code command)  
CODE93;X1;H7;10;20  
“ABCD5678”  
PDF;B;N  
(Printable data field)  
STOP  
END  
~EXECUTE;TEST  
(Ends bar code command)  
(Terminates Create Form mode)  
(Prints form)  
~NORMAL  
5–34  
Bar Codes  
 
Codabar  
The Codabar structure is shown in Figure 5–4 and described on the following  
pages.  
QUIET  
ZONE  
QUIET  
ZONE  
SR, SC  
POSITION  
SR, SC  
POSITION  
STOP  
CODE  
STOP  
CODE  
OPTIONAL  
CHECK  
DIGIT  
OPTIONAL  
CHECK  
DIGIT  
DATA  
FIELD  
DATA  
FIELD  
OPTIONAL  
READABLE  
DATA  
OPTIONAL  
READABLE  
DATA  
FIELD  
FIELD  
LOWER  
GUARD  
BAND  
START  
CODE  
START  
CODE  
LOWER  
GUARD  
BAND  
UPPER  
GUARD  
BAND  
UPPER  
GUARD  
BAND  
QUIET  
ZONE  
QUIET  
ZONE  
HEIGHT  
HEIGHT  
OPTIONAL  
CHECK DIGIT  
SR, SC  
POSITION  
OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD  
UPPER GUARD BAND  
HEIGHT  
QUIET START  
STOP QUIET  
CODE ZONE  
DATA FIELD  
ZONE  
CODE  
LOWER GUARD BAND  
OPTIONAL  
CHECK DIGIT  
SR, SC  
POSITION  
UPPER GUARD BAND  
DATA FIELD  
QUIET START  
STOP QUIET  
CODE ZONE  
HEIGHT  
ZONE  
CODE  
LOWER GUARD BAND  
OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD  
Figure 5–4. Codabar Structure  
Bar Codes  
5–35  
 
Quiet Zone  
Both ends of the bar code structure require blank quiet zones. The quiet  
zones must be at least 0.25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure  
accurate reading of the start/stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes  
from overlapping. Be sure to provide sufficient space on the form for the  
quiet zones.  
Start/Stop Codes  
The start/stop code is a unique character identifying the leading and trailing  
end of the bar code. The start/stop code is automatically produced with  
each bar code. The start/stop code structure permits bidirectional bar code  
scanning.  
Data Field  
The bar code symbol uses a series of wide and narrow bars and spaces to  
represent standard alphanumeric characters. Each wide or narrow bar or  
space is one element; each character in the data field has nine elements.  
The structure is three wide elements (bars or spaces) out of the nine total  
elements which compose one character.  
Readable Data  
The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the  
bar code data. It can be printed above or below the bar code symbol.  
Check Digit  
The optional modulo–43 check digit can be inserted into the bar code to  
verify accurate scanning.  
5–36  
Bar Codes  
 
Codabar Command Format  
BARCODE  
CODABAR [CD]; [VSCAN;] [MAG;] [Hn[.m];] [BFn;L;] [DARK;] SR;  
SC  
[(D)data field(D)]  
[PDF [;LOC] [;FONT]]  
STOP  
BARCODE  
The Bar Code command; enter BARCODE.  
CODABAR CD  
Designates bar code type Codabar; enter CODABAR.  
To calculate and plot the optional modulo–43 check  
digit with the bar code symbol automatically, enter  
CD.  
VSCAN  
Optional parameter to orient the bar code structure  
vertically. To select a vertical bar code, enter VSCAN.  
If VSCAN is not entered, the bar code is oriented  
horizontally.  
MAG  
Optional parameter to magnify (horizontally expand)  
the bar code symbol. The magnification default value  
is X1. As required for scanning, enter a magnification  
value to increase the magnification. Increasing the  
magnification adjusts printed character density.  
You can also use XR or XRD as defined on page 5–4.  
Hn[.m]  
Optional parameter to adjust the overall height  
(vertical expansion) of the bar code symbol (including  
the upper and lower 0.1– inch guard bands and any  
human readable data). Height adjustments are made in  
0.1–inch increments; enter H and a value from 4 to 99  
to select height adjustments from 0.4 to 9.9 inches. The  
default value is 0.9 inch.  
.m is an additional number of dots for the bar code  
height. (Dots are in the current dot scale.)  
Bar Codes  
5–37  
 
BFn;L  
Optional parameters for assigning a dynamic bar code  
data field location on a form and for designating the  
length of the data field. With these parameters, the  
actual data for the bar code data field is dynamically  
provided during the Execute Form Mode; the data is  
not specified during the Create Form Mode. To use this  
field, perform the following steps:  
a. Enter BF.  
b. Replace n with a number ranging from 1 to 255  
to identify the bar code field. The SR and SC  
parameters specify the exact location of the bar  
code field identified by n.  
c. Replace L with a number equaling the total  
number of characters in the field. (The actual  
data provided dynamically during the Execute  
Form Mode can be less than L.)  
d. The information for the data field is entered  
dynamically during the Execute Form Mode.  
(Refer to “Execute Form: Dynamic Bar Code  
Data” on page 4–55 in the “Commands”  
chapter.) Do not use the data field parameter to  
enter data when the BFn;L parameters are used.  
However, refer to the data field description for  
available characters.  
DARK  
Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar  
codes. Enter DARK. Refer to Dark Printing on page  
4–10 for more information.  
SR  
Defines the starting row for the bar code. Enter a value  
ranging from row 1 to one less than the length of the  
form. Character row or dot row is specified based on  
the Scale command (page 4–88), or use the CP.DP  
format (page 4–7).  
5–38  
Bar Codes  
 
SC  
Defines the starting column of the bar code. Enter a  
value ranging from column 1 to one less than the width  
of the form. Character column or dot column is  
specified based on the Scale command (page 4–88), or  
use the CP.DP format (page 4–7).  
D
The printable character (delimiter) identifying the start  
and finish of the data field. Enter any printable  
character other than a slash (/), the SFCC, or a  
character used within the data. The same character  
must be used at both ends of the data field, but it is not  
printed with the data.  
data field  
Contains the bar code characters. A null data field (no  
characters) is permitted. The length of the data field is  
variable; however, the maximum length is usually  
limited to 32 characters to minimize potential reading  
errors.  
PDF  
Optional parameter to enable printing of the human  
readable data field. Enter PDF to print the data field. If  
the parameter is not used, the human readable data will  
not print. This parameter is not allowed if a null data  
field is specified.  
LOC  
Optional parameter to identify the location of the  
printable data field. The default value is B, locating the  
human readable data below the bar code. A locates the  
printable data field above bar code. To compensate for  
printing the 0.1–inch high data, the height of the bar  
code body is reduced 0.1 inch.  
FONT  
Optional parameter to select the font for the human  
readable data field. The default value is N, selecting  
the normal ASCII 10 cpi font. Enter O to select the  
OCR–A 10 cpi font; enter X to select the OCR–B 10  
cpi type font.  
STOP  
Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP/PGL  
continues in the Create Form Mode. Enter STOP. If  
STOP is not entered, an error message results.  
Bar Codes  
5–39  
 
Table 5–12. Codabar Character Set  
Character  
Hex  
0
Character  
Hex  
24  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
$
:
1
3A  
2F  
2E  
2B  
41  
2
/
3
.
4
+
A
B
C
D
5
6
42  
7
43  
8
44  
9
2D  
5–40  
Bar Codes  
 
Codabar Example  
~CREATE;TEST;288  
(Enter Create Form mode)  
(Bar code command)  
SCALE;CHAR  
BARCODE  
CODABAR;VSCAN;X1;H7;5;20  
“A12345B”  
PDF;B;N  
(Printable data field)  
STOP  
(Ends bar code command)  
(Terminates Create Form mode)  
END  
~EXECUTE;TEST  
~NORMAL  
Bar Codes  
5–41  
 
Code 128B and Code 128C  
The Code 128 structure is shown in Figure 5–5 and described on the  
following pages.  
QUIET  
ZONE  
QUIET  
ZONE  
SR, SC  
POSITION  
SR, SC  
POSITION  
STOP  
CODE  
STOP  
CODE  
CHECK  
DIGIT  
FIELD  
CHECK  
DIGIT  
FIELD  
DATA  
FIELD  
DATA  
FIELD  
OPTIONAL  
READABLE  
DATA  
OPTIONAL  
READABLE  
DATA  
FIELD  
FIELD  
LOWER  
GUARD  
BAND  
START  
CODE  
START  
CODE  
LOWER  
GUARD  
BAND  
UPPER  
GUARD  
BAND  
UPPER  
GUARD  
BAND  
QUIET  
ZONE  
QUIET  
ZONE  
HEIGHT  
HEIGHT  
CHECK DIGIT  
FIELD  
SR, SC  
POSITION  
OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD  
UPPER GUARD BAND  
HEIGHT  
QUIET START  
STOP QUIET  
CODE ZONE  
DATA FIELD  
ZONE  
CODE  
LOWER GUARD BAND  
CHECK DIGIT  
FIELD  
SR, SC  
POSITION  
UPPER GUARD BAND  
DATA FIELD  
QUIET START  
STOP QUIET  
CODE ZONE  
HEIGHT  
ZONE  
CODE  
LOWER GUARD BAND  
OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD  
Figure 5–5. Code 128 Structure  
5–42  
Bar Codes  
 
Quiet Zone  
Both ends of the bar code structure require blank quiet zones. The quiet  
zones must be at least 0.25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure  
accurate reading of the start/stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes  
from overlapping. Be sure to provide sufficient space on the form for the  
quiet zones.  
Start/Stop Codes  
The start/stop codes identify the leading and trailing end of the bar code.  
Each of the Code 128 subsets uses a unique start code and a common stop  
code, both automatically provided by the IGP/PGL.  
Code 128B Data Field  
The bar code symbol uses a series of varying width bars and spaces to  
represent an extensive character set (96 ASCII characters and seven control  
characters). The bars and spaces vary in width from one to four modules.  
Each character consists of three bars and three spaces that total 11 modules.  
Code 128C Data Field  
The bar code symbol uses a series of varying width bars and spaces to  
represent 100 pairs of numeric digits (00 through 99) and 3 control  
characters. The bars and spaces vary in width from 1 to 4 modules. Each  
character consists of three bars and three spaces that total 11 modules.  
Readable Data  
The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the  
bar code data. It can be printed above or below the bar code symbol.  
Check Digit  
The modulo–103 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the  
bar code symbol. The check digit verifies accurate scanning. The start code  
is included in the check digit algorithm.  
Bar Codes  
5–43  
 
Code 128 Command Format  
BARCODE  
C128B or C128C; [VSCAN;] [MAG;] [Hn[.m];] [BFn;L;] [DARK;] SR;  
SC [(D)data field(D)]  
[PDF [;LOC] [;FONT]]  
STOP  
BARCODE  
The Bar Code command; enter BARCODE.  
C128B or C12BC Designates bar code type Code 128; enter C128B or  
C128C.  
VSCAN  
MAG  
Optional parameter to orient the bar code structure  
vertically. To select a vertical bar code, enter VSCAN.  
If VSCAN is not entered, the bar code is oriented  
horizontally.  
Optional parameter to magnify (horizontally expand)  
the bar code symbol. The magnification default value  
is X1. Increasing the magnification adjusts printed  
character density.  
You can also use XR or XRD as defined on page 5–4.  
(You must specify 8 digits for MAG for variable ratio.)  
Hn[.m]  
Optional parameter to adjust the overall height  
(vertical expansion) of the bar code symbol (including  
the upper and lower 0.1–inch guard bands and any  
human readable data). Height adjustments are made in  
0.1–inch increments; enter H and a value from 4 to 99  
to select height adjustments from 0.4 to 9.9 inches. The  
default value is 0.9 inch.  
.m is an additional number of dots for the bar code  
height. (Dots are in the current dot scale.)  
BFn;L  
Optional parameters for assigning a dynamic bar code  
data field location on a form and for designating the  
length of the data field. With these parameters, the  
actual data for the bar code data field is dynamically  
provided during the Execute Form Mode; the data is  
not specified during the Create Form Mode.  
5–44  
Bar Codes  
 
To use this field, perform the following steps.  
a. Enter BF.  
b. Replace n with a number ranging from 1 to 255  
to identify the bar code field. The SR and SC  
parameters specify the exact location of the bar  
code field identified by n.  
c. Replace L with a number equaling the total  
number of characters in the field. (The actual  
data provided dynamically during the Execute  
Form Mode can be less than L.)  
d. The information for the data field is entered  
dynamically during the Execute Form Mode.  
(Refer to “Execute Form: Dynamic Bar Code  
Data” on page 4–55 in the “Commands”  
chapter.) Do not use the data field parameter to  
enter data when the BFn;L parameters are used.  
However, refer to the data field description for  
available characters.  
DARK  
SR  
Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar  
codes. Enter DARK. Refer to “Dark Printing” on page  
4–10 for more information.  
Defines the starting row for the bar code. Enter a value  
ranging from row 1 to one less than the length of the  
form. Character row or dot row is specified based on  
the Scale command (page 4–88), or use the CP.DP  
format (page 4–7).  
SC  
Defines the starting column of the bar code. Enter a  
value ranging from column 1 to one less than the width  
of the form. Character column or dot column is  
specified based on the Scale command (page 4–88), or  
use the CP.DP format (page 4–7).  
D
The printable character (delimiter) identifying the start  
and finish of the data field. Enter any printable  
character other than a slash (/), the SFCC, or a  
character used within the data.  
Bar Codes  
5–45  
 
The same character must be used at both ends of the  
data field, but it will not print with the data.  
data field  
Enter the data for the bar code. A null data field (no  
characters) is permitted. Whenever a string of 6 or  
more contiguous numeric digits are detected, the  
IGP/PGL automatically inserts a Code C at the start of  
the numeric string and outputs numeric digit pairs  
packed into single bar code characters.  
When the string is broken (non–numeric data or an  
unpaired numeric digit occurs), the IGP/PGL  
automatically inserts a Code B and returns to normal  
C128B symbols. The length of the data field is  
variable; however, the maximum length is usually  
limited to 32 characters to minimize potential reading  
errors. The data field can contain any of the characters  
listed in Table 5–13 and Table 5–14, except the system  
SFCC.  
PDF  
LOC  
Optional parameter to enable printing of the human  
readable data field. Enter PDF to print the data field. If  
the parameter is not used, the human readable data will  
not print. This parameter is not allowed if a null data  
field was specified.  
Optional parameter to identify the location of the  
printable data field. The default value is B, locating the  
human readable data below the bar code. A locates the  
printable data field above bar code. To compensate for  
printing the 0.1–inch high data, the height of the bar  
code body is reduced 0.1 inch.  
FONT  
Optional parameter to select the font for the human  
readable data field. The default value, N, selects the  
normal ASCII 10 cpi font. Enter O to select the  
OCR–A 10 cpi font; enter X to select the OCR–B 10  
cpi type font.  
STOP  
Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP/PGL  
continues in the Create Form Mode. Enter STOP. If  
STOP is not entered, an error message results.  
5–46  
Bar Codes  
 
Table 5–13. Code 128B Character Set  
Character Hex  
Character Hex  
Character Hex  
Character  
Hex  
6E  
6F  
70  
SP  
!
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
2A  
2B  
2C  
2D  
2E  
2F  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
:
3A  
3B  
3C  
3D  
3E  
3F  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
4A  
4B  
4C  
4D  
4E  
4F  
50  
51  
52  
53  
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
5A  
5B  
5C  
5D  
5E  
5F  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
6A  
6B  
6C  
6D  
n
o
p
q
r
;
<
=
>
?
#
$
%
&
71  
72  
s
73  
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
t
74  
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
|
75  
(
\
76  
)
]
77  
*
+
,
78  
79  
7A  
7B  
7C  
7D  
.
a
b
c
d
e
f
/
}
~
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
J
7E  
7F  
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
FNC 3  
23 See NOTE  
22 See NOTE  
28 See NOTE  
27 See NOTE  
24 See NOTE  
25 See NOTE  
21 See NOTE  
(N/A)  
g
h
i
FNC 2  
SHIFT  
CODE C  
FUNC 4  
CODE A  
FNC 1  
j
k
l
m
START B  
STOP  
(N/A)  
NOTE:  
Access for the alternate set of control function characters is by using SO  
(Shift Out, hex 0E). The SO control code identifies the next character as the  
control function character, which must be inserted before each alternate  
character required.  
Bar Codes  
5–47  
 
Table 5–14. Code 128C Character Set  
Character  
Hex  
Character  
Hex  
Character  
Hex  
Character  
Hex  
00  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
30 30  
30 31  
30 32  
30 33  
30 34  
30 35  
30 36  
30 37  
30 38  
30 39  
31 30  
31 31  
31 32  
31 33  
31 34  
31 35  
31 36  
31 37  
31 38  
31 39  
32 30  
32 31  
32 32  
32 33  
32 34  
32 35  
32 36  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
32 37  
32 38  
32 39  
33 30  
33 31  
33 32  
33 33  
33 34  
33 35  
33 36  
33 37  
33 38  
33 39  
34 30  
34 31  
34 32  
34 33  
34 34  
34 35  
34 36  
34 37  
34 38  
34 39  
35 30  
35 31  
35 32  
35 33  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
78  
79  
80  
35 34  
35 35  
35 36  
35 37  
35 38  
35 39  
36 30  
36 31  
36 32  
36 33  
36 34  
36 35  
36 36  
36 37  
36 38  
36 39  
37 30  
37 31  
37 32  
37 33  
37 34  
37 35  
37 36  
37 37  
37 38  
37 39  
38 30  
81  
82  
83  
84  
85  
86  
87  
88  
89  
90  
91  
92  
93  
94  
95  
96  
97  
98  
99  
38 31  
38 32  
38 33  
38 34  
38 35  
38 36  
38 37  
38 38  
38 39  
39 30  
39 31  
39 32  
39 33  
39 34  
39 35  
39 36  
39 37  
39 38  
39 39  
CODE B  
26 See NOTE  
CODE A  
FNC 1  
25 See NOTE  
21 See NOTE  
(N/A)  
START  
STOP  
C
(N/A)  
NOTE:  
Access for the alternate set of control function characters is by using SO  
(Shift Out, hex 0E). The SO control code identifies the next character as the  
control function character, and must be inserted before each alternate  
character required.  
5–48  
Bar Codes  
 
Code 128B Example  
Figure 5–6 illustrates a horizontal and vertical Code 128B bar code generated  
by the following program:  
~CREATE;128B  
BARCODE  
(Enter Create Form Mode)  
(Bar Code command)  
C128B;DARK;40;15  
(Dark Code 128B at SR 40, SC 15)  
*SAMPLE CODE 128B* (Data Field)  
PDF;A  
(Upper Printable Data Field)  
STOP  
(Ends Bar Code command)  
(New Bar Code command)  
BARCODE  
C128B;VSCAN;H12;DARK;31;55  
(Vert. Dark C128B, H 1.2 at SR 31, SC 55)  
*SAMPLE CODE 128B* (Data Field)  
PDF  
(Printable Data Field)  
STOP  
(Ends Bar Code command)  
END  
(Terminate Create Form Mode)  
(Execute the form, form count of 1)  
~EXECUTE;128B;1  
SC 55  
SR 40  
Figure 5–6. Sample Code 128B Bar Codes  
Bar Codes  
5–49  
 
Code 128C Example  
Figure 5–7 illustrates a horizontal and vertical Code 128C bar code generated  
by the following program:  
~CREATE;128C  
BARCODE  
C128C;DARK;35;15  
*1234567890*  
PDF  
(Enter Create Form Mode)  
(Bar Code command)  
(Dark Code 128C at SR 35, SC 15)  
(Data Field)  
(Printable Data Field)  
STOP  
(Ends Bar Code command)  
(New Bar Code command)  
BARCODE  
C128C;VSCAN;H12;DARK;27;50  
(Vert. Dark C128C, H 1.2 at SR 27, SC 50)  
*1234567890*  
PDF  
(Data Field)  
(Printable Data Field)  
STOP  
(Ends Bar Code command)  
(Terminates Create Form Mode)  
(Execute the form, form count of 1)  
END  
~EXECUTE;128C;1  
SC 50  
S
SR 35  
Figure 5–7. Sample Code 128C Bar Codes  
5–50  
Bar Codes  
 
Code UCC –128  
The Code UCC–128 structure is shown in Figure 5–8 and described on the  
following pages.  
QUIET  
ZONE  
QUIET  
ZONE  
SR, SC  
POSITION  
SR, SC  
POSITION  
STOP  
CODE  
STOP  
CODE  
CHECK  
DIGIT  
FIELD  
CHECK  
DIGIT  
FIELD  
DATA  
FIELD  
DATA  
FIELD  
OPTIONAL  
READABLE  
DATA  
OPTIONAL  
READABLE  
DATA  
FIELD  
FIELD  
LOWER  
GUARD  
BAND  
START  
CODE  
START  
CODE  
LOWER  
GUARD  
BAND  
UPPER  
GUARD  
BAND  
UPPER  
GUARD  
BAND  
QUIET  
ZONE  
QUIET  
ZONE  
HEIGHT  
HEIGHT  
CHECK DIGIT  
FIELD  
SR, SC  
POSITION  
OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD  
UPPER GUARD BAND  
HEIGHT  
QUIET START  
ZONE CODE  
STOP QUIET  
CODE ZONE  
DATA FIELD  
LOWER GUARD BAND  
CHECK DIGIT  
FIELD  
SR, SC  
POSITION  
UPPER GUARD BAND  
DATA FIELD  
QUIET START  
ZONE CODE  
STOP QUIET  
CODE ZONE  
HEIGHT  
LOWER GUARD BAND  
OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD  
Figure 5–8. Code UCC–128 Structure  
Bar Codes  
5–51  
 
Quiet Zone  
Both ends of the bar code structure require blank quiet zones. The quiet  
zones must be at least 0.25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure  
accurate reading of the start/stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes  
from overlapping. Be sure to provide sufficient space on the form for the  
quiet zones.  
Start/Stop Codes  
The start/stop codes identify the leading and trailing end of the bar code.  
Each of the Code UCC–128 subsets uses a unique start code and a common  
stop code, both automatically provided by the IGP/PGL.  
Data Field  
The bar code symbol uses a series of varying width bars and spaces to  
represent 100 pairs of numeric digits (00 through 99) and 3 control  
characters. The bars and spaces vary in width from 1 to 4 modules. Each  
character consists of three bars and three spaces that total 11 modules.  
The IGP/PGL inserts a Function 1 character before the data. A mod–10  
check digit is calculated from 19 digits that represents a 2–digit qualifier,  
and 17–digit data portion.  
Readable Data  
The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the  
bar code data. It can be printed above or below the bar code symbol,  
appears in 13 CPI, and is broken up by spaces to denote UCC–128 data  
fields.  
Check Digit  
The modulo–10 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the  
bar code symbol. The check digit verifies accurate scanning. The start code  
is included in the check digit algorithm.  
The modulo–103 check digit is also automatically calculated and inserted  
in the bar code symbol. The check digit verifies accurate scanning. The  
start code is included in the check digit algorithm.  
5–52  
Bar Codes  
 
Code UCC–128 Command Format  
BARCODE  
UCC–128; [VSCAN;] [MAG;] [Hn[.m];] [BFn] [DARK;] SR; SC  
[(D)data field(D)]  
[PDF [;LOC] [;FONT]]  
STOP  
BARCODE  
UCC–128  
The Bar Code command; enter BARCODE.  
Designates bar code type Code UCC–128; enter  
UCC–128.  
VSCAN  
Optional parameter to orient the bar code structure  
vertically. To select a vertical bar code, enter VSCAN.  
If VSCAN is not entered, the bar code is oriented  
horizontally.  
MAG  
Optional parameter to magnify (horizontally expand)  
the bar code symbol. The magnification default value  
is X1. Increasing the magnification adjusts printed  
character density.  
You can also use XR or XRD as defined on page 5–4.  
(You must specify 8 digits for MAG for variable ratio.)  
Hn[.m]  
Optional parameter to adjust the overall height  
(vertical expansion) of the bar code symbol (including  
the upper and lower 0.1–inch guard bands and any  
human readable data).  
Height adjustments are made in 0.1–inch increments;  
enter H and a value from 4 to 99 to select height  
adjustments from 0.4 to 9.9 inches. The default value is  
0.9 inch.  
.m is an additional number of dots for the bar code  
height. (Dots are in the current dot scale.)  
Bar Codes  
5–53  
 
BFn  
Optional parameters for assigning a dynamic bar code  
data field location on a form and for designating the  
length of the data field. With these parameters, the  
actual data for the bar code data field is dynamically  
provided during the Execute Form Mode; the data is  
not specified during the Create Form Mode.  
To use this field, perform the following steps:  
a. Enter BF.  
b. Replace n with a number ranging from 1 to 255  
to identify the bar code field. The SR and SC  
parameters specify the exact location of the bar  
code field identified by n.  
c. The length of the data field need not be  
specified, since it is fixed at 19 digits, plus any  
add–on data.  
d. The information for the data field is entered  
dynamically during the Execute Form Mode.  
(Refer to “Execute Form: Dynamic Bar Code  
Data” on page 4–55 in the “Commands”  
chapter.) Do not use the data field parameter to  
enter data when the BFn parameters are used.  
However, refer to the data field description for  
available characters.  
DARK  
Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar  
codes. Enter DARK. Refer to “Dark Printing” on page  
4–10 for more information.  
SR  
Defines the starting row for the bar code. Enter a value  
ranging from row 1 to one less than the length of the  
form. Character row or dot row is specified based on  
the Scale command (page 4–88), or use the CP.DP  
format (page 4–7).  
SC  
Defines the starting column of the bar code. Enter a  
value ranging from column 1 to one less than the width  
of the form. Character column or dot column is  
specified based on the Scale command (page 4–88), or  
use the CP.DP format (page 4–7).  
5–54  
Bar Codes  
 
D
The printable character (delimiter) identifying the start  
and finish of the data field. Enter any printable  
character other than a slash (/), the SFCC, or a  
character used within the data. The same character  
must be used at both ends of the data field, but it will  
not print with the data.  
data field  
Enter the characters for the bar code data, restricted to  
exactly 19 digits. Enter the Packaging Type Number,  
followed by the 7 digit Manufacturing Number  
(including Number System Character preceded by zero  
if a UPC number). Enter the 9 digit Shipping Container  
Serial Number. The characters available for the data  
field are 0 through 9 (30 through 39 hex, respectively).  
PDF  
Optional parameter to enable printing of the human  
readable data field. Enter PDF to print the data field. If  
the parameter is not used, the human readable data will  
not print. This parameter is not allowed if a null data  
field was specified.  
LOC  
Optional parameter to identify the location of the  
printable data field. The default value is B, locating the  
human readable data below the bar code. A locates the  
printable data field above bar code. To compensate for  
printing the 0.1–inch high data, the height of the bar  
code body is reduced 0.1 inch.  
STOP  
Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP/PGL  
continues in the Create Form Mode. Enter STOP. If  
STOP is not entered, an error message results.  
NOTE:  
Refer to the Code 128C Character Set Table on page 5–48, for information  
on character sets.  
Bar Codes  
5–55  
 
Code UCC–128 Example  
Figure 5–9 illustrates a horizontal and vertical Code UCC–128 bar code  
generated by the following program:  
~CREATE;UCC–128  
BARCODE  
(Enter Create Form Mode)  
(Bar Code command)  
UCC–128;DARK;35;15  
(Dark Code UCC–128 at SR 35, SC 15)  
*1234567890123456789* (Data Field)  
PDF  
(Printable Data Field)  
STOP  
(Ends Bar Code command)  
(New Bar Code command)  
BARCODE  
UCC–128;VSCAN;H12;DARK;27;50  
(Vert. Dark UCC–128, H 1.2 at SR 27, SC 50)  
*1234567890123456789* (Data Field)  
PDF  
(Printable Data Field)  
STOP  
(Ends Bar Code command)  
END  
(Terminates Create Form Mode)  
(Execute the form, form count of 1)  
~EXECUTE;UCC–128;1  
SC 50  
SR 27  
SC 15  
SR 35  
Note: When using the PDF (printable data field)  
parameter, 13 cpi is the only option available.  
Figure 5–9. Sample Code UCC-128 Bar Codes  
5–56  
Bar Codes  
 
EAN 8  
The EAN 8 bar code structure is shown in Figure 5–10 and described on the  
following pages.  
SR, SC  
POSITION  
CENTER CODE  
START CODE  
STOP CODE  
QUIET  
ZONE  
LEFT DATA  
FIELD  
RIGHT DATA  
FIELD  
QUIET  
ZONE  
2– or 5–  
DIGIT  
ADD–ON  
CODE  
HEIGHT  
OPTIONAL READABLE  
DATA FIELD  
CHECK DIGIT FIELD  
SR, SC  
POSITION  
QUIET  
ZONE  
2– or 5–  
DIGIT  
ADD–ON  
CODE  
QUIET  
ZONE  
HEIGHT  
LEFT DATA  
FIELD  
RIGHT DATA  
FIELD  
STOP CODE  
START CODE  
CENTER CODE  
2– or 5–  
2– or 5–  
DIGIT  
ADD–ON  
CODE  
DIGIT  
ADD–ON  
CODE  
QUIET  
ZONE  
QUIET  
ZONE  
SR, SC  
POSITION  
SR, SC  
POSITION  
STOP  
CODE  
STOP  
CODE  
CHECK  
DIGIT  
FIELD  
CHECK  
DIGIT  
FIELD  
RIGHT  
DATA  
RIGHT  
DATA  
FIELD  
FIELD  
OPTIONAL  
READABLE  
OPTIONAL  
READABLE  
DATA  
CENTER  
CODE  
CENTER  
CODE  
DATA  
FIELD  
FIELD  
LEFT  
DATA  
FIELD  
LEFT  
DATA  
FIELD  
START  
CODE  
START  
CODE  
QUIET  
ZONE  
QUIET  
ZONE  
HEIGHT  
HEIGHT  
Figure 5–10. EAN 8 Structure  
Bar Codes  
5–57  
 
Quiet Zone  
Both ends of the bar code structure have blank quiet zones. The quiet zones  
must be at least 0.25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate  
reading of the start/stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes from  
overlapping. The IGP/PGL automatically produces the left quiet zone; be  
sure to provide sufficient space on the form for the right quiet zone.  
Start/Center/Stop Codes  
The start/center/stop codes are special character codes marking those  
portions of the bar code. These codes are automatically provided.  
Data Field  
The bar code symbol uses a series of varying width bars and spaces to  
represent a limited character set (numbers 0–9 and Special Characters Start,  
Center, and Stop). The bars and spaces vary in width from one to four  
modules. Each character consists of two bars and two spaces that total  
seven modules. The symbol coding of the left data field is different from  
the right data field to permit read direction sensing.  
The optional 2– or 5–digit add–on data, placed within the delimiter at the  
end of the bar code, typically identifies a periodical issue number or price,  
respectively.  
Readable Data  
The human readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar  
code data. It can either be suppressed or printed below the bar code symbol.  
Check Digit  
The modulo–10 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the  
bar code symbol. The check digit verifies accurate scanning.  
5–58  
Bar Codes  
 
EAN 8 Command Format  
BARCODE  
EAN8 [+n]; [VSCAN;] [SCB;] [MAG;] [Hn[.m];] [BFn;] [DARK;] SR;  
SC  
[(D)data field(D)]  
[PDF [;LOC] [;FONT]]  
STOP  
BARCODE  
EAN8  
+n  
The Bar Code command; enter BARCODE.  
Designates bar code type EAN 8; enter EAN8.  
Optional parameter to provide a 2– or 5–digit add–on  
code at the end of the bar code data field. Enter a plus  
sign (+) and a value of 2 or 5. The first bar of the  
add–on code is separated by nine modules from the last  
bar of the EAN symbol and a left guard pattern.  
No center or right guard pattern exists.  
VSCAN  
Optional parameter to orient the bar code structure  
vertically. To select a vertical bar code, enter VSCAN.  
If VSCAN is not entered, the bar code is oriented  
horizontally.  
SCB  
This option shortens the length of the center guard  
bars, which are normally full length.  
MAG  
Optional parameter to magnify (horizontally expand)  
the bar code symbol. The magnification default value  
is X1.  
You can also use XR or XRD as defined on page 5–4.  
(You must specify 8 digits for MAG for variable ratio.)  
Hn[.m]  
Optional parameter to adjust the overall height  
(vertical expansion) of the bar code symbol (including  
the upper and lower 0.1–inch guard bands and any  
human readable data).  
Bar Codes  
5–59  
 
Height adjustments are made in 0.1–inch increments;  
enter H and a value from 4 to 99 to select height  
adjustments from 0.4 to 9.9 inches. The default value is  
1.3 inches.  
.
.m is an additional number of dots for the bar code  
height. (Dots are in the current dot scale.)  
BFn  
Optional parameter for assigning a dynamic bar code  
data field location on a form. With this parameter, the  
actual data for the bar code data field is dynamically  
provided during the Execute Form Mode; the data is  
not specified during the Create Form Mode. To use this  
field:  
a. Enter BF.  
b. Replace n with a number ranging from 1 to 255  
to identify the bar code field. The SR and SC  
parameters specify the exact location of the bar  
code field identified by n.  
c. The length of the data field need not be specified  
since it is fixed at seven digits, plus any add–on  
data.  
d. The information for the data field is entered  
dynamically during the Execute Form Mode.  
(Refer to “Execute Form: Dynamic Bar Code  
Data” on page 4–55 in the “Commands”  
chapter.) Do not use the data field parameter to  
enter data when the BFn parameters are used.  
However, refer to the data field description for  
available characters.  
DARK  
Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar  
codes. Enter DARK. Refer to “Dark Printing” on page  
4–10 for more information.  
5–60  
Bar Codes  
 
SR  
SC  
D
Defines the starting row for the bar code. Enter a value  
ranging from row 1 to one less than the length of the  
form. Character row or dot row is specified based on  
the Scale command (page 4–88), or use the CP.DP  
format (page 4–7).  
Defines the starting column of the bar code. Enter a  
value ranging from column 1 to one less than the width  
of the form. Character column or dot column is  
specified based on the Scale command (page 4–88), or  
use the CP.DP format (page 4–7).  
The printable character (delimiter) identifying the start  
and finish of the data field. Enter any printable  
character other than a slash (/), the SFCC, or a  
character used within the data. The same character  
must be used at both ends of the data field, but it will  
not print with the data.  
data field  
The characters of the bar code data are restricted to  
exactly seven digits. If the 2– or 5–digit add–on data  
option is used, include this data at the end of the data  
field. The characters available for the data field are 0  
through 9 (30 through 39 hex, respectively).  
PDF  
Optional parameter to print the human readable data  
field. The data field prints automatically unless the  
PDF–suppress command is specified in the FONT  
parameter. The human-readable data field can be  
printed above or below the bar code symbol.  
This parameter is not allowed if a null data field is  
specified. If no PDF command is entered, the data  
field will print automatically in the default OCR–B  
font.  
LOC  
Optional parameter to identify the location of the  
printable data field. The default value is B, locating the  
human readable data below the bar code. A locates the  
printable data field above bar code. To compensate for  
printing the 0.1–inch high data, the height of the bar  
code body is reduced 0.1 inch.  
Bar Codes  
5–61  
 
FONT  
Optional parameter to select the font for the human  
readable data field. The default value, N, selects the  
normal ASCII 10 cpi font. Enter O to select the  
OCR–A 10 cpi font; enter X to select the OCR–B type  
font. Enter S to suppress printing the data field and the  
trailing lower portions of the EAN bar code.  
STOP  
Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP/PGL  
continues in the Create Form Mode. Enter STOP. If  
STOP is not entered, an error message results.  
5–62  
Bar Codes  
 
EAN 8 Example  
Figure 5–11 illustrates a horizontal and vertical EAN 8 bar code generated by  
the following program:  
~CREATE;EAN8  
BARCODE  
(Enter Create Form Mode)  
(Bar Code command)  
EAN8+2;H9;DARK;33;15 (Dark Code EAN 8, 2–digit add–on,  
H 0.9, SR 33, SC 15)  
*123456722*  
PDF  
(Data Field plus 2–digit add–on Data Field)  
(Printable Data Field)  
STOP  
(Ends Bar Code command)  
(New Bar Code command)  
BARCODE  
EAN8+2;VSCAN;H10;DARK;33;55  
(Vertical Dark EAN 8, 2–digit add–on,  
H 1.0, SR 33, SC 55)  
*123456722*  
PDF  
(Data Field plus 2–digit add–on Data Field)  
(Printable Data Field)  
STOP  
(Ends Bar Code command)  
END  
(Terminates Create Form Mode)  
(Execute the form, form count of 1)  
~EXECUTE;EAN8;1  
SC 55  
SR 33  
Figure 5–11. Sample EAN 8 Bar Codes  
Bar Codes  
5–63  
 
EAN 13  
The EAN 13 bar code structure is shown in Figure 5–12 and described on the  
following pages.  
SR, SC  
POSITION  
CENTER CODE  
START CODE  
STOP CODE  
QUIET  
ZONE  
LEFT DATA  
FIELD  
RIGHT DATA  
FIELD  
QUIET  
ZONE  
2– or 5–  
DIGIT  
ADD–ON  
CODE  
HEIGHT  
NUMBER  
SYSTEM  
N
CHARACTER  
OPTIONAL READABLE  
DATA FIELD  
CHECK DIGIT FIELD  
SR, SC  
POSITION  
QUIET  
ZONE  
2– or 5–  
DIGIT  
ADD–ON  
CODE  
QUIET  
ZONE  
HEIGHT  
LEFT DATA  
FIELD  
RIGHT DATA  
FIELD  
NUMBER  
SYSTEM  
N
CHARACTER  
STOP CODE  
START CODE  
CENTER CODE  
2– or 5–  
2– or 5–  
DIGIT  
ADD–ON  
CODE  
DIGIT  
ADD–ON  
CODE  
QUIET  
ZONE  
QUIET  
ZONE  
SR, SC  
SR, SC  
POSITION  
POSITION  
STOP  
CODE  
STOP  
CODE  
CHECK  
DIGIT  
FIELD  
CHECK  
DIGIT  
FIELD  
RIGHT  
DATA  
RIGHT  
DATA  
FIELD  
FIELD  
OPTIONAL  
READABLE  
OPTIONAL  
READABLE  
DATA  
CENTER  
CODE  
CENTER  
CODE  
DATA  
FIELD  
FIELD  
LEFT  
DATA  
FIELD  
LEFT  
DATA  
FIELD  
START  
CODE  
START  
CODE  
QUIET  
ZONE  
QUIET  
ZONE  
NUMBER  
SYSTEM  
CHARACTER  
NUMBER  
SYSTEM  
CHARACTER  
N
N
HEIGHT  
HEIGHT  
Figure 5–12. EAN 13 Structure  
5–64  
Bar Codes  
 
Quiet Zone  
Quiet zones extend on both ends of the bar code to permit the scan to begin  
and end in a blank area. The IGP/PGL automatically produces an 11-  
module-wide left quiet zone; you are responsible for providing sufficient  
space (minimum of seven modules) on the form for the right quiet zone.  
The number system character is also printed automatically in the left quiet  
zone.  
Start/Center/Stop Codes  
The start/center/stop codes are special character codes marking those  
portions of the bar code. These codes are automatically provided.  
Number System Character  
The number system character field allows you to provide a code to a class  
or type of item. The first character in the data field is used as the number  
system character.  
Data Field  
The bar code symbol uses a series of varying width bars and spaces to  
represent a limited character set (numbers 0–9 and Special Characters Start,  
Center, and Stop). The bars and spaces vary in width from one to four  
modules. Each character consists of two bars and two spaces that total  
seven modules. The symbol coding of the left data field is different from  
the right data field to permit read direction sensing.  
The optional 2– or 5–digit add–on data field is placed within the delimiter  
at the end of the bar code data and typically identifies a periodical issue  
number or price, respectively.  
Readable Data  
The human readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar  
code data. It can either be suppressed or printed below the bar code symbol.  
Check Digit  
The modulo–10 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the  
bar code symbol. The check digit verifies accurate scanning. The number  
system character is included in the check digit algorithm.  
Bar Codes  
5–65  
 
EAN 13 Command Format  
BARCODE  
EAN13 [+n]; [VSCAN;] [SCB;] [MAG;] [Hn[.m];] [BFn;] [DARK;] SR;  
SC  
[(D)data field(D)]  
[PDF [;LOC] [;FONT]]  
STOP  
BARCODE  
EAN13  
+n  
The Bar Code command; enter BARCODE.  
Designates bar code type EAN 13; enter EAN13.  
Optional parameter to provide a 2– or 5–digit add–on  
code at the end of the bar code data field. Enter a plus  
sign (+) and a value of 2 or 5. The first bar of the  
add–on code is separated by nine modules from the last  
bar of the EAN symbol and a left guard pattern. No  
center or right guard pattern exists.  
VSCAN  
Optional parameter to orient the bar code structure  
vertically. To select a vertical bar code, enter VSCAN.  
If VSCAN is not entered, the bar code is oriented  
horizontally.  
SCB  
This option shortens the length of the center guard  
bars, which are normally full length.  
MAG  
Optional parameter to magnify (horizontally expand)  
the bar code symbol. The magnification default value  
is X1. Increasing the magnification adjusts printed  
character density.  
You can also use XR or XRD as defined on page 5–4.  
(You must specify 8 digits for MAG for variable ratio.)  
5–66  
Bar Codes  
 
Hn[.m]  
Optional parameter to adjust the overall height  
(vertical expansion) of the bar code symbol (including  
the upper and lower 0.1–inch guard bands and any  
human readable data). Height adjustments are made in  
0.1–inch increments; enter H and a value from 4 to 99  
to select height adjustments from 0.4 to 9.9 inches. The  
default value is 1.3 inches.  
.m is an additional number of dots for the bar code  
height. (Dots are in the current dot scale.)  
BFn  
Optional parameter for assigning a dynamic bar code  
data field location on a form. With this parameter, the  
actual data for the bar code data field is dynamically  
provided during the Execute Form Mode; the data is  
not specified during the Create Form Mode. To use this  
field, perform the following steps:  
a. Enter BF.  
b. Replace n with a number ranging from 1 to 255  
to identify the bar code field. The SR and SC  
parameters specify the exact location of the bar  
code field identified by n.  
c. The length of the data field need not be  
specified, since it is fixed at 12 digits, plus any  
add–on data.  
d. The information for the data field is entered  
dynamically during the Execute Form Mode.  
(Refer to “Execute Form: Dynamic Bar Code  
Data” on page 4–55 in the “Commands”  
chapter.) Do not use the data field parameter to  
enter data when the BFn parameters are used.  
However, refer to the data field description for  
available characters.  
DARK  
Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar  
codes. Enter DARK. Refer to “Dark Printing” on page  
4–10 for more information.  
Bar Codes  
5–67  
 
SR  
SC  
D
Defines the starting row for the bar code. Enter a value  
ranging from row 1 to one less than the length of the  
form. Character row or dot row is specified based on  
the Scale command (page 4–88), or use the CP.DP  
format (page 4–7).  
Defines the starting column of the bar code. Enter a  
value ranging from column 1 to one less than the width  
of the form. Character column or dot column is  
specified based on the Scale command (page 4–88), or  
use the CP.DP format (page 4–7).  
The printable character (delimiter) identifying the start  
and finish of the data field. Enter any printable  
character other than a slash (/), the SFCC, or a  
character used within the data. The same character  
must be used at both ends of the data field, but it is not  
printed with the data.  
data field  
Enter the characters of the bar code data, restricted to  
exactly 12 digits. If the 2– or 5–digit add–on data  
option is used, include this data at the end of the data  
field. The characters available for the data field are 0  
through 9 (30 through 39 hex, respectively). The first  
character is interpreted as the number system character.  
The left side of the data field (or lower side on  
vertically oriented symbols) can be encoded in either  
format A or format B as determined by the value of the  
number system character. (A bar code character is not  
produced for the number system character.)  
The number system character is derived from the left  
side data field encoding. The right side of the data field  
(or upper side on vertically oriented symbols) and  
check digit are always encoded in format C.  
Table 5–15 defines the left side data field format based  
on the number system character.  
5–68  
Bar Codes  
 
PDF  
Optional parameter which affects printing of the  
human readable data field. The data field will print  
automatically in the OCR–B font (default) unless the  
PDF–suppress command is specified in the FONT  
parameter. The human-readable data field can be  
printed above or below the bar code symbol. This  
parameter is not allowed if a null data field is  
specified.  
LOC  
Optional parameter to identify the location of the  
printable data field. The default value is B, locating the  
human readable data below the bar code. A locates the  
printable data field above bar code. To compensate for  
printing the 0.1–inch high data, the height of the bar  
code body is reduced 0.1 inch.  
FONT  
STOP  
Optional parameter to select the font for the human  
readable data field. The default value, N, selects the  
normal ASCII 10 cpi font. Enter O to select the  
OCR–A 10 cpi font; enter X to select the OCR–B type  
font; enter S to suppress printing the data field and the  
trailing lower portions of the EAN bar code.  
Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP/PGL  
continues in the Create Form Mode. Enter STOP. If  
STOP is not entered, an error message results.  
Table 5–15. Left Side Data Field Format  
Format for Left Side Data Field Positions  
Number System  
CharacterValue  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
B
B
B
B
B
B
A
B
B
B
A
B
B
A
A
B
A
A
B
B
A
A
B
B
B
A
A
B
A
B
B
A
A
A
B
B
A
B
B
A
B
B
A
B
A
A
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Bar Codes  
5–69  
 
EAN 13 Example  
Figure 5–13 illustrates a horizontal and vertical EAN 13 bar code generated  
by the following program:  
~CREATE;EAN13  
BARCODE  
(Enter Create Form Mode)  
(Bar Code Command)  
EAN13+5;DARK;28;15  
(Dark Code EAN 13, 5–digit add on,  
at SR 28, SC 15)  
*12345678987655555*  
(Data Field plus 5–digit add–on Data Field)  
(Printable Data Field)  
PDF  
STOP  
(Ends Bar Code command)  
(New Bar Code command)  
BARCODE  
EAN13+5;VSCAN;H12;DARK;27;39  
(Vertical Dark EAN 13, 2–digit add on, H 1.2,  
at SR 27, SC 39)  
*12345678987655555*  
(Data Field plus 5–digit add on Data Field)  
(Printable Data Field)  
PDF  
STOP  
(Ends Bar Code command)  
(Terminates Create Form Mode)  
(Execute the form, form count of 1)  
END  
~EXECUTE;EAN13;1  
SC 39  
SR 27  
SR 28  
Figure 5–13. Sample EAN 13 Bar Codes  
5–70  
Bar Codes  
 
FIM  
The FIM (Facing Identification Mark) bar code structure is shown in  
Figure 5–14 and Figure 5–15 and described on the following pages. The left  
boundary must begin 3 inches from the right edge of the mail piece. The  
right–most bar must be 2 inches ± 1/8–inch from the right edge of the mail  
piece. Bars must be 5/8–inch ± 1/8–inch tall; the top of the bars must be no  
lower than 1/8–inch from the top edge of the mail piece (and may touch the  
top edge of the mail piece). The bar code baseline must be within 1/8–inch  
from the bottom edge of the clear zone.  
SR, SC  
POSITION  
3”  
NOTE: Illustration is not to scale  
Return Address Area  
2”– 1–7/8”  
1–3/4”  
1–1/4”  
1/8”  
5/8”  
Clear  
Zone  
(Optional Line) NON–ADDRESS DATA  
(Top Line) NAME OF RECIPIENT  
(Optional Line) INFORMATION/ATTENTION LINE  
(Line Above Last) DELIVERY ADDRESS  
(Last Line) POST OFFICE STATE ZIP  
Figure 5–14. FIM Structure  
Bar Codes  
5–71  
 
1–3/4”  
SR, SC  
POSITION  
3”  
1/8” Clear  
Zone  
1–1/4”  
5/8”  
opLine)  
(T  
(satLine)  
AobveLast)  
(
(OptoalLine)  
(iLne  
NOET:Iuirntosceal  
Figure 5–15. FIM Structure (VSCAN)  
NOTE: Additional information regarding FIM bar code requirements can be  
obtained from the U.S. Postal Service’s Publication 25: A Guide to  
Business Mail Preparation.  
5–72  
Bar Codes  
 
Clear Zone  
The bar code structure requires a completely blank, 1/4–inch wide,  
5/8–inch tall clear zone, reserved for only the appropriate FIM pattern. Be  
sure to provide sufficient space for this zone.  
Start/Stop Code  
The start/stop code is a unique character identifying the leading and trailing  
end of the bar code. The start/stop code is automatically produced with  
each bar code. The start/stop code structure permits bidirectional bar code  
scanning.  
Data Field  
The bar code symbol uses a nine–position bar/no–bar pattern of tall (full)  
bars of uniform height. Minimum height must be 5/8– inch ± 1/8–inch.  
(Bar height may be longer to wrap around the top of the envelope.)  
Minimum bar width is .031–inch ± .008–inch. Spacing (pitch) between  
each bar/no–bar must be 1/16–inch. Bar tilt (slant) can vary ± 5 degrees  
(relative to a line perpendicular to the top edge of the envelope).  
Bar Codes  
5–73  
 
FIM Command Format  
BARCODE  
FIM; [VSCAN;] [Hn[.m];] [BFn;] [DARK;] SR; SC  
[(D)data field(D)]  
STOP  
BARCODE  
FIM  
The Bar Code command; enter BARCODE.  
Designates bar code type FIM; enter FIM.  
VSCAN  
Optional parameter to orient the bar code structure  
vertically. To select a vertical bar code, enter VSCAN.  
If VSCAN is not entered, the bar code is oriented  
horizontally.  
Hn[.m]  
Optional parameter to adjust the overall height  
(vertical expansion) of the bar code symbol (including  
the upper and lower 0.1–inch guard bands and any  
human readable data).  
Height adjustments are made in 0.1–inch increments;  
enter H and a value from 6 to 99 to select height  
adjustments from 0.6 to 9.9 inches. The default value is  
0.6 inches.  
.m is an additional number of dots for the bar code  
height. (Dots are in the current dot scale.)  
BFn  
Optional parameter for assigning a dynamic bar code  
data field location on a form. With this parameter, the  
actual data for the bar code data field is dynamically  
provided during the Execute Form Mode; the data is  
not specified during the Create Form Mode.  
To use this field, perform the following steps:  
a. Enter BF.  
b. Replace n with a number ranging from 1 to 255  
to identify the bar code field. The SR and SC  
parameters specify the exact location of the bar  
code field identified by n.  
5–74  
Bar Codes  
 
c. The information for the data field is entered  
dynamically during the Execute Form Mode.  
(Refer to “Execute Form: Dynamic Bar Code  
Data” on page 4–55 in the “Commands”  
chapter.) Do not use the data field parameter to  
enter data when the BFn parameters are used.  
Refer to the data field description for available  
characters.  
DARK  
Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar  
codes. Enter DARK. Refer to “Dark Printing” on page  
4–10 for more information.  
SR  
Defines the starting row for the bar code. Enter a value  
1/8–inch from the top edge of the mail piece. Character  
row or dot row is specified based on the Scale  
command (page 4–88), or use the CP.DP format (page  
4–7).  
data field  
A single–character data field to designate one of four  
available FIM patterns: A, B, C, or D. Based on your  
application (check with your Postal Service for more  
information), replace n with one of the following FIM  
types:  
A Used only on courtesy reply envelopes bearing a  
preprinted POSTNET bar code (page 5–98); it  
requires a luminescent stamp or meter mark to  
be accepted in the facer/canceler.  
B
Used on Business Reply Mail, Penalty Mail, and  
Franked Mail without a preprinted POSTNET  
bar code, and does not require luminescent  
indicia.  
C Used on Business Reply Mail, Penalty Mail, or  
Franked Mail bearing a preprinted POSTNET  
bar code (page 5–98).  
D Used on OCR readable mail (usually courtesy  
reply window envelopes) without a preprinted  
POSTNET bar code.  
STOP  
Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP/PGL  
continues in the Create Form Mode. Enter STOP. If  
STOP is not entered, an error message results.  
Bar Codes  
5–75  
 
FIM Example  
Figure 5–16 below illustrates a horizontal FIMB bar code from the following  
program without the POSTNET preprinted bar code (POSTNET is discussed  
on page 5–98.)  
~CREATE;FIMB  
(Enter Create Form Mode)  
(Alpha command)  
ALPHA  
23;11;0;0;*PRINTRONIX, INC.*  
25;11;0;0;*ATTN: CUSTOMER SERVICE*  
27;11;0;0;*P.O. BOX 19559*  
29;11;0;0;*IRVINE, CA 92714–9559*  
STOP  
(Ends Alpha command)  
BARCODE  
FIM;DARK;15;22  
*B*  
(Bar Code command)  
(Dark FIM Bar Code at SR 15, SC 22)  
(Data field selecting FIMB Bar Code)  
(Ends FIMB Bar Code command)  
(Terminates Create Form Mode)  
(Executes the form, form count of 1)  
STOP  
END  
~EXECUTE;FIMB;1  
Figure 5–16. Sample FIMB Bar Code  
5–76  
Bar Codes  
 
Figure 5–17 illustrates a horizontal FIMC bar code generated by the  
following program and bears the preprinted POSTNET bar code.  
~CREATE;FIMC  
ALPHA  
(Enter Create Form Mode)  
(Alpha command)  
23;11;0;0;*PRINTRONIX, INC.*  
25;11;0;0;*ATTN: CUSTOMER SERVICE*  
27;11;0;0;*P.O. BOX 19559*  
29;11;0;0;*IRVINE, CA 92714–9559*  
STOP  
(Ends Alpha command)  
BARCODE  
FIM;DARK;17;25  
*C*  
(Bar Code command)  
(Dark FIM Bar Code at SR 17, SC 25)  
(Data field selecting FIMC Bar Code)  
(Ends Bar Code command)  
STOP  
BARCODE  
(New Bar Code command)  
POSTNET;DARK;33.3;15 (Dark POSTNET Bar Code at SR 33.3, SC 15)  
*927149559*  
STOP  
(POSTNET data field)  
(Ends POSTNET Bar Code command)  
(Terminates Create Form Mode)  
(Executes the form, form count of 1)  
END  
~EXECUTE;FIMC;1  
SR
Figure 5–17. Sample FIMC Bar Code  
Bar Codes  
5–77  
 
Interleaved 2/5 (I–2/5), German I–2/5  
The I–2/5 bar code structure is shown in Figure 5–18 and described on the  
following pages.  
QUIET  
ZONE  
QUIET  
ZONE  
SR, SC  
POSITION  
SR, SC  
POSITION  
STOP  
CODE  
STOP  
CODE  
OPTIONAL  
CHECK  
DIGIT  
OPTIONAL  
CHECK  
DIGIT  
DATA  
FIELD  
DATA  
FIELD  
OPTIONAL  
READABLE  
DATA  
OPTIONAL  
READABLE  
DATA  
FIELD  
FIELD  
LOWER  
GUARD  
BAND  
START  
CODE  
START  
CODE  
LOWER  
GUARD  
BAND  
UPPER  
GUARD  
BAND  
UPPER  
GUARD  
BAND  
QUIET  
ZONE  
QUIET  
ZONE  
HEIGHT  
HEIGHT  
OPTIONAL  
CHECK DIGIT  
SR, SC  
POSITION  
OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD  
UPPER GUARD BAND  
HEIGHT  
QUIET START  
STOP QUIET  
CODE ZONE  
DATA FIELD  
ZONE  
CODE  
LOWER GUARD BAND  
OPTIONAL  
CHECK DIGIT  
SR, SC  
POSITION  
UPPER GUARD BAND  
QUIET START  
STOP QUIET  
CODE ZONE  
DATA FIELD  
HEIGHT  
ZONE  
CODE  
LOWER GUARD BAND  
OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD  
Figure 5–18. I–2/5 Structure  
5–78  
Bar Codes  
 
Quiet Zone  
Both ends of the bar code structure have blank quiet zones. The quiet zones  
must be at least 0.25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate  
reading of the start/stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes from  
overlapping. Be sure to provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet  
zones.  
Start/Stop Codes  
Unique start and stop codes permit bidirectional scanning. Both start and  
stop codes contain bars and spaces. They are automatically produced.  
Data Field  
The bar code symbol uses a series of wide and narrow bars and spaces to  
represent numeric characters. The structure is 2 wide elements (bars or  
spaces) and 3 narrow elements. In the bar code, two characters are  
interleaved (paired); bars are used to represent the first character in the pair  
and spaces are used to represent the second character in the pair.  
Readable Data  
The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the  
bar code data. It can be printed above or below the bar code symbol.  
Check Digit  
The modulo-10 check digit can be inserted into the bar code to verify  
accurate scanning. For the German variation of I-2/5, the checksum digit is  
always automatically calculated and inserted.  
Bar Codes  
5–79  
 
I–2/5 Command Format  
BARCODE  
I–2/5 [CD]; [VSCAN;] [MAG;] [Hn[.m];] [BFn;L;] [DARK;] SR; SC  
[(D)data field(D)]  
[PDF [;LOC] [;FONT]]  
STOP  
I–2/5 German Command Format  
BARCODE  
I25GERMAN; [VSCAN;] [MAG;] [Hn[.m];] [BFn;L;] [DARK;] SR; SC  
[(D) data field (D)]  
[PDF [;LOC] [;FONT]]  
STOP  
BARCODE  
I–2/5 CD  
The Bar Code command; enter BARCODE.  
Designates bar code type Interleaved 2/5; enter I–2/5.  
To calculate and plot the optional modulo–10 check  
digit with the bar code symbol automatically, enter  
CD. For the German variation of the bar code, enter  
I25GERMAN, instead of I-2/5 (the checksum digit is  
always automatically calculated for German I-2/5).  
VSCAN  
Optional parameter to orient the bar code structure  
vertically. To select a vertical bar code, enter VSCAN.  
If VSCAN is not entered, the bar code is oriented  
horizontally.  
MAG  
Optional parameter to magnify (horizontally expand)  
the bar code symbol. The magnification default value  
is X1. For the German variation of the bar code, the  
default magnification is X1A. As required for  
scanning, enter a magnification value to increase the  
magnification. Increasing the magnification adjusts  
printed character density. You can also use XR or XRD  
as defined on page 5–4.  
5–80  
Bar Codes  
 
Hn[.m]  
Optional parameter to adjust the overall height  
(vertical expansion) of the bar code symbol (including  
the upper and lower 0.1–inch guard bands and any  
human readable data).  
Height adjustments are made in 0.1–inch increments;  
enter H and a value from 4 to 99 to select height  
adjustments from 0.4 to 9.9 inches. The default value is  
0.9–inch.  
.m is an additional number of dots for the bar code  
height. (Dots are in the current dot scale.)  
BFn;L  
Optional parameters for assigning a dynamic bar code  
data field location on a form and for designating the  
length of the data field. With these parameters, the  
actual data for the bar code data field is dynamically  
provided during the Execute Form Mode; the data is  
not specified during the Create Form Mode. To use this  
field, perform the following steps:  
a. Enter BF.  
b. Replace n with a number ranging from 1 to 255  
to identify the bar code field. The SR and SC  
parameters specify the exact location of the bar  
code field identified by n.  
c. Replace L with a number equaling the total  
number of characters in the field. (The actual  
data provided dynamically during the Execute  
Form Mode can be less than L.)  
d. The information for the data field is entered  
dynamically during the Execute Form Mode.  
(Refer to “Execute Form: Dynamic Bar Code  
Data” on page 4–55 in the “Commands”  
chapter.) Do not use the data field parameter to  
enter data when the BFn;L parameters are used.  
However, refer to the data field description for  
available characters.  
DARK  
Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar  
codes. Enter DARK. Refer to “Dark Printing” on page  
4–10 for more information.  
Bar Codes  
5–81  
 
SR  
Defines the starting row for the bar code. Enter a value  
ranging from row 1 to one less than the length of the  
form. Character row or dot row is specified based on  
the Scale command (page 4–88), or use the CP.DP  
format (page 4–7).  
Defines the starting column of the bar code. Enter a  
value ranging from column 1 to one less than the width  
of the form. Character column or dot column is  
specified based on the Scale command (page 4–88), or  
use the CP.DP format (page 4–7).  
D
The printable character (delimiter) identifying the start  
and finish of the data field. Enter any printable  
character other than a slash (/), the SFCC, or a  
character used within the data.  
The same character must be used at both ends of the  
data field, but it will not print with the data.  
data field  
Enter the characters for the bar code data. A null data  
field (no characters) is permitted. The length of the  
data field is variable; however, the maximum length is  
usually limited to 32 characters to minimize potential  
reading errors.  
For German I-2/5, however, data length should be  
either 11 or 13.  
For regular I-2/5, an even number of characters is  
required for the interleaving process. Consequently, if  
an odd number of characters are entered in the data  
field, a leading zero is added automatically.  
The characters available for the data field are 0 through  
9 (30 through 39 hex, respectively).  
PDF  
Optional parameter to enable printing of the human  
readable data field. Enter PDF to print the data field. If  
the parameter is not used, the human readable data is  
not printed.  
This parameter is not allowed if a null data field was  
specified.  
5–82  
Bar Codes  
 
LOC  
Optional parameter to identify the location of the  
printable data field. The default value is B, locating the  
human readable data below the bar code. A locates the  
printable data field above bar code.  
To compensate for printing the 0.1–inch high data, the  
height of the bar code body is reduced 0.1–inch.  
FONT  
Optional parameter to select the font for the human  
readable data field. The default value, N, selects the  
normal ASCII 10 cpi font. Enter O to select the  
OCR–A 10 cpi font; enter X to select the OCR–B type  
font.  
STOP  
Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP/PGL  
continues in the Create Form Mode. Enter STOP. If  
STOP is not entered, an error message results.  
I–2/5 Example  
Figure 5–19 illustrates a horizontal and vertical I–2/5 bar code generated by  
the following program:  
~CREATE;I25  
BARCODE  
I–2/5;DARK;49;27  
*24688642*  
PDF;A  
(Enter Create Form Mode)  
(Bar Code command)  
(Dark Code I–2/5, at SR 49, SC 27)  
(Data Field)  
(Upper Printable Data Field)  
(Ends Bar Code command)  
(New Bar Code command)  
STOP  
BARCODE  
I–2/5;VSCAN;H12;DARK;44;52  
(Vertical Dark I–2/5, H 1.2 at SR 44, SC 52)  
*24688642*  
PDF  
(Data Field)  
(Printable Data Field)  
STOP  
(Ends Bar Code command)  
(Terminates Create Form Mode)  
(Execute the form, form count of 1)  
END  
~EXECUTE;I25;1  
Bar Codes  
5–83  
 
SC 52  
S
SR 49  
Figure 5–19. Sample I–2/5 Bar Codes  
5–84  
Bar Codes  
 
MSI  
The MSI bar code structure is shown in Figure 5–20 and described on the  
following pages.  
QUIET  
ZONE  
QUIET  
ZONE  
SR, SC  
POSITION  
SR, SC  
POSITION  
STOP  
CODE  
STOP  
CODE  
CHECK  
DIGIT  
FIELD  
CHECK  
DIGIT  
FIELD  
DATA  
FIELD  
DATA  
FIELD  
OPTIONAL  
READABLE  
DATA  
OPTIONAL  
READABLE  
DATA  
FIELD  
FIELD  
LOWER  
GUARD  
BAND  
START  
CODE  
START  
CODE  
LOWER  
GUARD  
BAND  
UPPER  
GUARD  
BAND  
UPPER  
GUARD  
BAND  
QUIET  
ZONE  
QUIET  
ZONE  
HEIGHT  
HEIGHT  
CHECK DIGIT  
FIELD  
SR, SC  
POSITION  
OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD  
UPPER GUARD BAND  
HEIGHT  
QUIET START  
ZONE CODE  
STOP QUIET  
CODE ZONE  
DATA FIELD  
LOWER GUARD BAND  
CHECK DIGIT  
FIELD  
SR, SC  
POSITION  
UPPER GUARD BAND  
DATA FIELD  
QUIET START  
ZONE CODE  
STOP QUIET  
CODE ZONE  
HEIGHT  
LOWER GUARD BAND  
OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD  
Figure 5–20. MSI Structure  
Bar Codes  
5–85  
 
Quiet Zone  
Both ends of the bar code structure require blank quiet zones. The quiet  
zones must be at least 0.25–inches wide and completely blank to ensure  
accurate reading of the start/stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes  
from overlapping. Be sure to provide sufficient space on the form for the  
quiet zones.  
Start/Stop Code  
Unique start and stop codes permit bidirectional scanning. Both start and  
stop codes contain bars and spaces. They are automatically produced.  
Data Field  
The bar code symbol uses a series of wide and narrow bars and spaces to  
represent each numeric character. The structure is four wide elements (bars  
or spaces) and four narrow elements. Each character contains four data bits,  
with each 0–bit made up of a narrow bar/wide space arrangement and each  
1–bit made up of a wide bar/narrow space arrangement.  
Readable Data  
The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the  
bar code data. It can be printed above or below the bar code symbol.  
Check Digit  
If specified, the modulo–10 or modulo–11 (or both) check digit is  
automatically calculated and inserted in the bar code symbol. The check  
digit verifies accurate scanning. A number system character is included in  
the check digit algorithm.  
5–86  
Bar Codes  
 
MSI Command Format  
BARCODE  
MSI n; [VSCAN;] [MAG;] [Hn[.m];] [BFn;L;] [DARK;] SR; SC  
[(D)data field(D)]  
[PDF [;LOC] [;FONT]]  
STOP  
BARCODE  
The Bar Code command; enter BARCODE.  
MSI  
Designates bar code type MSI; enter MSI.  
n
Designates the type of check digit combinations for the  
bar code. Replace n with one of the following codes to  
specify the check digit.  
A single–digit modulo–10 followed by a second  
modulo–10 digit  
B
single–digit modulo–11 followed by a single  
modulo–10 digit  
C single–digit modulo–10  
D single–digit modulo–11  
VSCAN  
Optional parameter to orient the bar code structure  
vertically. To select a vertical bar code, enter VSCAN.  
If VSCAN is not entered, the bar code is oriented  
horizontally.  
MAG  
Optional parameter to magnify (horizontally expand)  
the bar code symbol. The magnification default value  
is X1. As required for scanning, enter a magnification  
value to increase the magnification. Increasing the  
magnification adjusts printed character density.  
You can also use XR or XRD as defined on page 5–4.  
Hn[.m]  
Optional parameter to adjust the overall height  
(vertical expansion) of the bar code symbol (including  
the upper and lower 0.1–inch guard bands and any  
human readable data). Height adjustments are made in  
0.1–inch increments; enter H and a value from 4 to 99  
to select height adjustments from 0.4 to 9.9 inches.  
Bar Codes  
5–87  
 
The default value is 0.9–inch. .m is an additional  
number of dots for the bar code height. (Dots are in the  
current dot scale.)  
BFn;L  
Optional parameters for assigning a dynamic bar code  
data field location on a form and for designating the  
length of the data field. With these parameters, the  
actual data for the bar code data field is dynamically  
provided during the Execute Form Mode; the data is  
not specified during the Create Form Mode. To use this  
field:  
a. Enter BF.  
b. Replace n with a number ranging from 1 to 255  
to identify the bar code field. The SR and SC  
parameters specify the exact location of the bar  
code field identified by n.  
c. Replace L with a number equaling the total  
number of characters in the field. (The actual  
data provided dynamically during the Execute  
Form Mode can be less than L.)  
d. The information for the data field is entered  
dynamically during the Execute Form Mode.  
(Refer to “Execute Form: Dynamic Bar Code  
Data” on page 4–55 in the “Commands”  
chapter.) Do not use the data field parameter to  
enter data when the BFn;L parameters are used.  
However, refer to the data field description for  
available characters.  
DARK  
Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar  
codes. Enter DARK. Refer to “Dark Printing” on page  
4–10 for more information.  
SR  
Defines the starting row for the bar code. Enter a value  
ranging from row 1 to one less than the length of the  
form. Character row or dot row is specified based on  
the Scale command (page 4–88), or use the CP.DP  
format (page 4–7).  
5–88  
Bar Codes  
 
SC  
Defines the starting column of the bar code. Enter a  
value ranging from column 1 to one less than the width  
of the form. Character column or dot column is  
specified based on the Scale command (page 4–88), or  
use the CP.DP format (page 4–7).  
D
The printable character (delimiter) identifying the start  
and finish of the data field. Enter any printable  
character other than a slash (/), the SFCC, or a  
character used within the data. The same character  
must be used at both ends of the data field, but it will  
not print with the data.  
data field  
Enter the characters for the bar code data. A null data  
field (no characters) is permitted. The length of the  
data field is variable; however, a maximum of 14 data  
characters are allowed if a one–character check digit  
field is specified; a maximum of 13 data characters are  
allowed if a two–character check digit field is  
specified.  
The characters available for the data field are 0 through  
9 (30 through 39 hex, respectively).  
PDF  
Optional parameter to enable printing of the human  
readable data field. Enter PDF to print the data field. If  
the parameter is not used, the human readable data will  
not print.  
LOC  
Optional parameter to identify the location of the  
printable data field. The default value is B, locating the  
human readable data below the bar code. A locates the  
printable data field above the bar code. To compensate  
for printing the 0.1–inch high data, the height of the  
bar code body is reduced 0.1–inch.  
Bar Codes  
5–89  
 
FONT  
Optional parameter to select the font for the human  
readable data field. The default value, N, selects the  
normal ASCII 10 cpi font. Enter O to select the  
OCR–A 10 cpi font; enter X to select the OCR–B type  
font.  
STOP  
Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP/PGL  
continues in the Create Form Mode. Enter STOP. If  
STOP is not entered, an error message results.  
5–90  
Bar Codes  
 
MSI Example  
Figure 5–21 illustrates a horizontal and vertical MSI bar code generated by  
the following program:  
~CREATE;MSI  
BARCODE  
MSIA;DARK;32;27  
*24688642*  
PDF;X  
(Enter Create Form Mode)  
(Bar Code command)  
(Dark Bar Code MSIA at SR 32, SC 27)  
(Data Field)  
(Printable Data Field, OCR–B)  
(Ends Bar Code command)  
(New Bar Code command)  
STOP  
BARCODE  
MSIB;VSCAN;X2;H12;DARK;32;54  
(Vertical Dark MSIB, Mag 2, H 1.2 at SR 32, SC  
54)  
*24688642*  
PDF;A  
(Data Field)  
(Upper Data Field)  
STOP  
(Ends Bar Code command)  
(Terminates Create Form Mode)  
(Execute the form, form count of 1)  
END  
~EXECUTE;MSI;1  
SC 27  
SC 54  
SR 32  
Figure 5–21. Sample MSI Bar Codes  
Bar Codes  
5–91  
 
PDF417  
The PDF417 structure is shown in Figure 5–22 and described on the  
following pages.  
SR, SC  
POSITION  
QUIET  
ZONE  
STOP  
CODE  
DATA  
FIELD  
START  
CODE  
LOWER  
GUARD  
BAND  
UPPER  
GUARD  
BAND  
QUIET  
ZONE  
SR, SC  
POSITION  
UPPER GUARD BAND  
QUIET START  
ZONE CODE  
STOP QUIET  
CODE ZONE  
DATA FIELD  
LOWER GUARD BAND  
Figure 5–22. PDF417 Structure  
5–92  
Bar Codes  
 
Quiet Zone  
Both ends of the bar code structure require blank quiet zones. The quiet  
zones must be at least 0.25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure  
accurate reading of the start/stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes  
from overlapping. Be sure to provide sufficient space on the form for the  
quiet zones.  
Start/Stop Codes  
The start/stop codes identify the leading and trailing end of the bar code.  
Data Field  
PDF417 provides twelve modes to encode data. The first three are  
pre–established (the remaining nine are user modes, which can be defined  
by users or industry associations according to specific applications):  
1. Extended Alphanumeric Compaction mode (EXC). Comprised of four  
sub–modes, this mode offers encodation of all printable ASCII  
characters. This is the default mode; the PGL uses shift or latch  
characters to enable other modes.  
2. Binary/ASCII Plus mode. This offers encodation for all ASCII  
characters, printable or not, and binary values.  
3. Numeric Compaction mode. This offers encodation for numeric values  
to a density of almost 3 digits per code word.  
The PGL will automatically switch between modes to provide the smallest  
encodation for the data.  
Security Level  
PDF417 can detect and correct errors. Each label has 2 code words of error  
detection. You can select the error correction capacity based on application  
needs. Specify a security level in the range of 0 – 8, at the time of printing.  
PDF417 can also recover from omissions and misdecodes of code words.  
Since it requires two code words to recover from a misdecode, one to detect  
the error and one to correct for it, a given security level can support half the  
number of misdecodes that it can of undecoded words.  
PDF  
Print Data Field is not offered due to the large amount of data that can be  
encoded.  
Bar Codes  
5–93  
 
PDF417 Command Format  
BARCODE  
PDF417; [X[D]n;] [Y[D]n;] [(Hn)| (Wn);] [ASPECTh:w;] [(Rn)| (Cn);]  
[Sn;][BFn;L;] [DARK;] SR; SC(T)  
[(D)data field(D)(T)]  
STOP (T)  
BARCODE  
PDF417  
X[D]n  
The Bar Code command; enter BARCODE.  
Designates bar code type PDF417; enter PDF417.  
Optional parameter to designate the width of the  
narrow element in either the default 60 x 72 dots per  
inch or, if the D is given, in target dots. (The target dot  
is 300 dpi for the T3308, T3306 and T3304 printer  
models and 203 dpi for the T3204 printer model.) The  
default size is 1/60th of an inch.  
Y[D]n  
Optional parameter to designate the height of the bar  
code in either the default 60 X 72 dots per inch or, if  
the D is given, in target dots. (The target dot is 300 dpi  
for the T3308, T3306 and T3304 printer models and  
203 dpi for the T3204 printer model.) The default size  
is 2/72nd of an inch.  
Hn  
Optional parameter to adjust the overall height of the  
bar code symbol (including human readable data).  
Height adjustments are made in 0.1–inch increments;  
enter H and a value from 4 to 99 to select height  
adjustments from 0.4 to 9.9 inches. Parameters Wn,  
Rn, Cn or ASPECT can not be entered if this  
parameter is used.  
Wn  
Optional parameter for the maximum width of the  
symbol based on the narrow element width. Enter Wn;  
where n is the overall width in tenths of an inch.  
Parameters Hn, Rn, Cn or ASPECT can not be entered  
if this parameter is used.  
5–94  
Bar Codes  
 
ASPECT;h:w  
Optional parameter for specifying the symbol  
height–to–width ratio where h is the height and w is  
the width, both expressed as integers. The default is  
1:2. Parameters Hn, Wn, Rn, or Cn cannot be entered if  
this parameter is used.  
Rn  
Cn  
Optional parameter that specifies the number of rows  
the symbol will have. Enter R; followed by the number  
of rows in the range of 3 to 90 in multiples of 3.  
Parameters Hn, Wn, Cn or ASPECT can not be entered  
if this parameter is used.  
Optional parameter that specifies the number of  
columns the symbol will have. Enter C; followed by  
the number of columns in the range of 1 to 90.  
Parameters Hn, Wn, Rn or ASPECT can not be entered  
if this parameter is used.  
Sn  
Optional parameter that specifies the security level.  
Enter S; followed by the security level in the range of  
0–8. The default is 2.  
BFn;L  
Optional parameters for assigning a dynamic bar code  
data field location on a form and for designating the  
length of the data field. With these parameters, the  
actual data for the bar code data field is dynamically  
provided during the Execute Form Mode; the data is  
not specified during the Create Form Mode. To use this  
field, perform the following steps:  
a. Enter BF.  
b. Replace n with a number ranging from 1 to 255  
to identify the bar code field. The SR and SC  
parameters specify the exact location of the bar  
code field identified by n.  
c. Replace L with a number equaling the total  
number of characters in the field. (The actual  
data provided dynamically during the Execute  
Form Mode can be less than L.)  
Bar Codes  
5–95  
 
d. The information for the data field is entered  
dynamically during the Execute Form Mode.  
(Refer to “Execute Form: Dynamic Bar Code  
Data” on page 4–55 in the “Commands”  
chapter.) Do not use the data field parameter to  
enter data when the BFn;L parameters are used.  
However, refer to the data field description for  
available characters.  
DARK  
SR  
Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar  
codes. Enter DARK. Refer to “Dark Printing” on page  
4–10 for more information.  
Defines the starting row for the bar code. Enter a value  
ranging from row 1 to one less than the length of the  
form. Character row or dot row is specified based on  
the Scale command (page 4–88), or use the CP.DP  
format (page 4–7).  
SC  
Defines the starting column of the bar code. Enter a  
value ranging from column 1 to one less than the width  
of the form. Character column or dot column is  
specified based on the Scale command (page 4–88), or  
use the CP.DP format (page 4–7).  
D
The printable character (delimiter) identifying the start  
and finish of the data field. Enter any printable  
character other than a slash (/), the SFCC, or a  
character used within the data. The same character  
must be used at both ends of the data field, but it will  
not print with the data.  
data field  
Enter the data for the bar code. A null data field (no  
characters) is not permitted. The data field can contain  
any character including carriage returns and line feeds.  
The length of the data field is variable; however, the  
maximum length is usually limited to1024 bytes to  
minimize potential reading errors.  
NOTE: New lines (i.e. carriage returns/line feeds) are allowed in the  
PDF417 data field and as PDF417 dynamic data field input.  
5–96  
Bar Codes  
 
STOP  
Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP/PGL  
continues in the Create Form Mode. Enter STOP. If  
STOP is not entered, an error message results.  
PDF417 Example  
Figure 5–23 illustrates a horizontal PDF417 bar code generated by the  
following program:  
~CREATE;PDF417  
BARCODE  
(Enter Create Form Mode)  
(Bar Code command)  
PDF417;XD3;YD9;S0;7;21 (PDF417; width; height, security level, SR, SC)  
*PRINTRONIX SUPPORTS PRINTING OF PDF417 TWO–DIMENSIONAL  
BAR CODE SYMBOLOGY 123456789012345678901234567890123456789*  
STOP  
(Ends Bar Code command)  
(Terminate Create Form Mode)  
(Execute the form)  
END  
~EXECUTE;PDF  
Figure 5–23. Sample PDF417 Bar Code  
Bar Codes  
5–97  
 
POSTNET  
The POSTNET bar code structure is illustrated in Figure 5–24 and  
Figure 5–25 and described on the following pages. The POSTNET code can  
be a part of the address block and appear anywhere within a vertical 4–inch  
area across the length of the mailpiece.  
Return Address Area  
Postage Area  
ADDRESS BLOCK BAR CODE READ AREA  
4”  
1/2”  
1/2”  
SR, SC  
POSITION  
CLEAR ZONE  
BAR CODE DATA FIELD  
CLEAR ZONE  
CLEAR  
ZONE  
CLEAR  
ZONE  
START  
CODE  
STOP  
CODE  
CHECK DIGIT  
NOTE: Illustration is not to scale  
Figure 5–24. POSTNET Structure  
NOTE: Additional information regarding POSTNET bar code requirements  
can be obtained from the U.S. Postal Service’s Publication 25: A  
Guide to Business Mail Preparation.  
5–98  
Bar Codes  
 
1/2”  
CLEAR  
ZONE  
STOP  
CODE  
CHECK DIGIT  
SR, SC  
POSITION  
BAR  
CODE  
DATA  
FIELD  
START  
CODE  
4”  
CLEAR  
ZONE  
1/2”  
NOTE: Illustration is not to scale  
Figure 5–25. POSTNET Structure (VSCAN)  
Bar Codes  
5–99  
 
Clear Zone  
The bar code structure requires a completely blank clear zone which  
extends 4.75 inches from the right edge of the mailpiece. In addition, a  
minimum clear zone of 0.040–inch above and below the bar code data must  
also be provided. Be sure to provide sufficient space for this zone.  
Start/Stop Code  
The start and stop codes are referred to as “framing bars” in POSTNET.  
The start and stop codes are each one tall bar, one identifying the leading  
and trailing end of the bar code. The start/stop code is automatically  
produced with each bar code. The start/stop code structure permits bar code  
scanning in a left–to right direction only.  
Data Field  
The bar code data produces a single field of 30 bars for a 5–digit field, 50  
bars for a 9–digit data field, or 60 bars for an 11–digit data field. The bars  
are grouped in sets of five. Each set of five bars (comprised of two tall bars  
and three short bars) represents one of the five digits of the zip code, plus  
the four–digit zip code extension. If the Advanced Bar Code is used, an  
additional two–digit code is also added to make an 11–digit data field.  
Each bar width is equal, and must be .020–inch ± .005–inch. Each bar  
height is either a tall (full) or short (half) bar, representing a 1 or 0,  
respectively. Each tall bar must be .125–inch ± .010–inch; each short bar  
must be .050–inch ± .010–inch. Horizontal spacing between bars (pitch)  
must be 22 bars ± 2 bars per inch over any 0.50–inch portion of the bar  
code.  
Horizontal spacing at 24 and 20 bars per inch is 0.0416–inch and  
.050–inch, respectively, with a clear vertical space ranging from 0.012–inch  
to 0.040–inch between bars.  
Check Digit  
The sixth, tenth or twelfth digit represents the automatic check digit  
character for the 5, 9 or 11–digit data field, respectively. The check digit is  
added automatically to verify accurate scanning.  
5–100  
Bar Codes  
 
POSTNET Command Format  
BARCODE  
POSTNET; [VSCAN;] [BFn;L;] [DARK;] SR; SC  
[(D)data field(D)]  
STOP  
BARCODE  
POSTNET  
VSCAN  
The Bar Code command; enter BARCODE.  
Designates bar code type POSTNET; enter POSTNET.  
Optional parameter to orient the bar code structure  
vertically. To select a vertical bar code, enter VSCAN.  
If VSCAN is not entered, the bar code is oriented  
horizontally.  
BFn;L  
Optional parameters for assigning a dynamic bar code  
data field location on a form and for designating the  
length of the data field. With these parameters, the  
actual data for the bar code data field is dynamically  
provided during the Execute Form Mode; the data is  
not specified during the Create Form Mode. To use this  
field, perform the following steps:  
a. Enter BF.  
b. Replace n with a number ranging from 1 to 255  
to identify the bar code field. The SR and SC  
parameters specify the exact location of the bar  
code field identified by n.  
c. Replace L with a number equaling the total  
number of characters in the field. The data field  
must be numeric and contain exactly 5, 9 or 11  
digits.  
d. The information for the data field is entered  
dynamically during the Execute Form Mode.  
(Refer to “Execute Form: Dynamic Bar Code  
Data” on page 4–55 in the “Commands”  
chapter.) Do not use the data field parameter to  
enter data when the BFn parameters are used.  
However, refer to the data field description for  
available characters.  
Bar Codes  
5–101  
 
e. Replace L with a number equaling the total  
number of characters in the field. (The actual  
data provided dynamically during the Execute  
Form Mode can be less than L.)  
f. The information for the data field is entered  
dynamically during the Execute Form Mode.  
(Refer to “Execute Form: Dynamic Bar Code  
Data” on page 4–55 in the “Commands”  
chapter.) Do not use the data field parameter to  
enter data when the BFn parameters are used.  
However, refer to the data field description for  
available characters.  
DARK  
Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar  
codes. Enter DARK. Refer to “Dark Printing” on page  
4–10 for more information.  
SR  
Defines the starting row for the bar code. Enter a value  
within the range of the 4–inch vertical address block.  
Character row or dot row is specified based on the  
Scale command (page 4–88), or use the CP.DP format  
(page 4–7).  
SC  
Defines the starting column of the bar code. Enter a  
value between the 1/2–inch left and right margins of  
the mailpiece. Character column or dot column is  
specified based on the Scale command (page 4–88), or  
use the CP.DP format (page 4–7).  
D
The printable character (delimiter) identifying the start  
and finish of the data field. Enter any printable  
character other than a slash (/) the SFCC, or a character  
used within the data. The same character must be used  
at both ends of the data field but it will not print with  
the data.  
data field  
The bar code data. Enter 5 digits (for zip code), 9 digits  
for a nine–digit zip code, or 11 digits (for the  
Advanced Bar Code format). The available characters  
for the data field are 0 through 9 (30 through 39 hex,  
respectively).  
5–102  
Bar Codes  
 
STOP  
Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP/PGL  
continues in the Create Form Mode. Enter STOP. If  
STOP is not entered, an error message will result.  
Figure 5–26 illustrates a horizontal and vertical POSTNET bar code  
generated by the following program:  
~CREATE;POSTNET  
BARCODE  
(Enter Create Form Mode)  
(Bar code command)  
POSTNET;DARK;10;40  
*601159912*  
STOP  
(Dark POSTNET bar code at SR 10, SC 40)  
(ZIP + 4 data field 60115–9912)  
(Ends Bar Code command)  
(Terminates Create Form Mode)  
(Enter Create Form Mode)  
(Bar code command)  
END  
~CREATE;POSTNET  
BARCODE  
POSTNET;VSCAN;DARK;10;20  
(Dark Vertical bar code POSTNET at SR 10, SC 40)  
*601159912*  
STOP  
(ZIP + 4 data field 60115–9912)  
(Ends Bar Code command)  
END  
(Terminates Create Form Mode)  
~EXECUTE;POSTNET;1 (Execute the form, with a form count of 1)  
SC 20  
SR
Figure 5–26. Sample POSTNET Bar Codes  
Bar Codes  
5–103  
 
UPC–A  
The UPC–A bar code structure is shown in Figure 5–27 and described on the  
following pages.  
SR, SC  
POSITION  
START CODE  
CENTER CODE  
STOP CODE  
QUIET  
ZONE  
LEFT DATA  
FIELD  
RIGHT DATA  
FIELD  
QUIET  
ZONE  
2– or 5–  
DIGIT  
ADD–ON  
CODE  
HEIGHT  
NUMBER  
SYSTEM  
C
N
CHARACTER  
CHECK DIGIT  
CHARACTER  
CHECK DIGIT FIELD  
NUMBER SYSTEM  
CHARACTER FIELD  
OPTIONAL READABLE  
DATA FIELD  
SR, SC  
POSITION  
QUIET  
ZONE  
2– or 5–  
DIGIT  
ADD–ON  
CODE  
QUIET  
ZONE  
HEIGHT  
LEFT DATA  
FIELD  
RIGHT DATA  
FIELD  
NUMBER  
SYSTEM  
N
C
CHARACTER  
STOP CODE  
START CODE  
CENTER  
CODE  
CHECK DIGIT  
CHARACTER  
CHECK DIGIT FIELD  
2– or 5–  
DIGIT  
ADD–ON  
CODE  
2– or 5–  
DIGIT  
ADD–ON  
CODE  
CHECK  
CHECK  
QUIET  
ZONE  
C
C
QUIET  
ZONE  
DIGIT  
DIGIT  
SR, SC  
POSITION  
SR, SC  
POSITION  
CHARACTER  
CHARACTER  
STOP CODE  
STOP CODE  
CHECK  
DIGIT  
FIELD  
CHECK  
DIGIT  
FIELD  
RIGHT  
RIGHT  
DATA  
DATA  
FIELD  
FIELD  
OPTIONAL  
READABLE  
DATA  
OPTIONAL  
READABLE  
DATA  
CENTER  
CODE  
CENTER CODE  
FIELD  
FIELD  
LEFT  
DATA  
FIELD  
LEFT  
DATA  
FIELD  
NUMBER  
NUMBER  
SYSTEM  
CHARACTER  
FIELD  
SYSTEM  
CHARACTER  
FIELD  
START CODE  
START CODE  
QUIET  
ZONE  
QUIET  
ZONE  
NUMBER  
SYSTEM  
NUMBER  
SYSTEM  
N
N
CHARACTER  
CHARACTER  
HEIGHT  
HEIGHT  
Figure 5–27. UPC–A Structure  
5–104  
Bar Codes  
 
Quiet Zone  
Quiet zones extend on both ends of the bar code to permit the scan to begin  
and end in a blank area. The IGP/PGL automatically produces an  
11–module wide left quiet zone; you are responsible for providing  
sufficient space (minimum of seven modules) on the form for the right  
quiet zone. The number system character is also printed automatically in  
the left quiet zone.  
Start/Center/Stop Codes  
The start/center/stop codes are special character codes marking those  
portions of the bar code. These codes are automatically provided.  
Number System Character  
The number system character field allows you to provide a code to a class  
or type of item. The first character in the data field is used as the number  
system character.  
Data Field  
The bar code symbol uses a series of varying width bars and spaces to  
represent a limited character set (numbers 0–9 and Special Characters Start,  
Center, and Stop). The bars and spaces vary in width from one to four  
modules. Each character consists of two bars and two spaces that total  
seven modules. The symbol coding of the left data field is different from  
the right data field to permit read direction sensing.  
The optional 2– or 5–digit add–on data field is placed at the end of the bar  
code and typically identifies a periodical issue number or price,  
respectively.  
Readable Data  
The human readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar  
code data. It can either be suppressed or printed below the bar code symbol.  
Check Digit  
The modulo–10 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the  
bar code symbol. The check digit verifies accurate scanning. The number  
system character is included in the check digit algorithm.  
Bar Codes  
5–105  
 
UPC–A Command Format  
BARCODE  
UPC–A [+n]; [VSCAN;] [SCB;] [MAG;] [Hn[.m];] [BFn;] [DARK;] SR;  
SC  
[(D)data field(D)]  
[PDF [;LOC] [;FONT]  
STOP  
BARCODE  
UPC–A  
+n  
The Bar Code command; enter BARCODE.  
Designates bar code type UPC–A; enter UPC–A.  
Optional parameter to provide a 2– or 5–digit add–on  
code at the end of the bar code data field. Enter a plus  
sign (+) and a value of 2 or 5. The first bar of the  
add–on code is separated by nine modules from the last  
bar of the UPC symbol and a left guard pattern.  
VSCAN  
Optional parameter to orient the bar code structure  
vertically. To select a vertical bar code, enter VSCAN.  
If VSCAN is not entered, the bar code is oriented  
horizontally.  
SCB  
This option shortens the length of the center guard  
bars, which are normally full length.  
MAG  
Optional parameter to magnify (horizontally expand)  
the bar code symbol. The magnification default value  
is X1. Enter a magnification value to increase the  
magnification. Increasing the magnification adjusts  
printed character density.  
You can also use XR or XRD as defined on page 5–4.  
(You must specify 8 digits for MAG for variable ratio.)  
5–106  
Bar Codes  
 
Hn[.m]  
Optional parameter to adjust the overall height  
(vertical expansion) of the bar code symbol (including  
the upper and lower 0.1–inch guard bands and any  
human readable data). Height adjustments are made in  
0.1–inch increments; enter H and a value from 4 to 99  
to select height adjustments from 0.4 to 9.9 inches. The  
default value is 1.3 inches.  
.m is an additional number of dots for the bar code  
height. (Dots are in the current dot scale.)  
BFn  
Optional parameter for assigning a dynamic bar code  
data field location on a form. With this parameter, the  
actual data for the bar code data field is dynamically  
provided during the Execute Form Mode; the data is  
not specified during the Create Form Mode. To use this  
field, perform the following steps:  
a. Enter BF.  
b. Replace n with a number ranging from 1 to 255  
to identify the bar code field. The SR and SC  
parameters specify the exact location of the bar  
code field identified by n.  
c. The length of the data field need not be  
specified, since it is fixed at 11 digits, plus any  
add–on data.  
d. The information for the data field is entered  
dynamically during the Execute Form Mode.  
(Refer to “Execute Form: Dynamic Bar Code  
Data” on page 4–55 in the “Commands”  
chapter.) Do not use the data field parameter to  
enter data when the BFn parameters are used.  
However, refer to the data field description for  
available characters.  
DARK  
Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar  
codes. Enter DARK. Refer to “Dark Printing” on page  
4–10 for more information.  
Bar Codes  
5–107  
 
SR  
SC  
D
Defines the starting row for the bar code. Enter a value  
ranging from row 1 to one less than the length of the  
form. Character row or dot row is specified based on  
the Scale command (page 4–88), or use the CP.DP  
format (page 4–7).  
Defines the starting column of the bar code. Enter a  
value ranging from column 1 to one less than the width  
of the form. Character column or dot column is  
specified based on the Scale command (page 4–88), or  
use the CP.DP format (page 4–7).  
The printable character (delimiter) identifying the start  
and finish of the data field. Enter any printable  
character other than a slash (/), the SFCC, or a  
character used within the data. (It will not print with  
the data.) Use the same character at both ends of the  
data field.  
data field  
Enter the characters for the bar code data, restricted to  
exactly 11 digits. If the 2– or 5–digit add–on data  
option is used, include this data at the end of the data  
field. The first digit is interpreted as the number system  
character. The remaining 10 digits are the data field  
characters. The characters available for the data field  
are 0 through 9 (30 through 39 hex, respectively).  
PDF  
Optional parameter which affects printing of the  
human readable data field. The data field will print  
automatically unless the PDF–suppress command is  
specified in the FONT parameter. OCR-B characters  
can be printed above or below the bar code symbol.  
This parameter is not allowed if a null data field is  
specified. If the PDF command is not entered in the  
UPC–A command format, the data field automatically  
prints in OCR–B.  
5–108  
Bar Codes  
 
LOC  
Optional parameter to identify the location of the  
printable data field. The default value is B, locating the  
human readable data below the bar code. A locates the  
printable data field above bar code. To compensate for  
printing the 0.1–inch high data, the height of the bar  
code body is reduced 0.1–inch.  
FONT  
Optional parameter to select the font for the human  
readable data field. The default font type for UPC–A  
bar codes is OCR–B; if no PDF command is entered in  
the command format, the data field is printed  
automatically in OCR–B. Entering X will also  
designate the OCR–B type font. Enter N to select the  
normal ASCII 10 cpi font; enter O to select the  
OCR–A 10 cpi font. Enter S to suppress printing the  
data field and the trailing lower portions of the UPC  
bar code.  
STOP  
Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP/PGL  
continues in the Create Form Mode. Enter STOP. If  
STOP is not entered, an error message results.  
Bar Codes  
5–109  
 
UPC–A Example  
Figure 5–28 illustrates a horizontal and vertical UPC–A bar code generated  
by the following program:  
~CREATE;UPCA  
BARCODE  
(Enter Create Form Mode)  
(Bar Code command)  
UPC–A+5;H9;DARK;39;15 (Dark Code UPC–A, 5–digit add–on,  
H 0.9, SR 39, SC 15)  
*1234567887655555*  
PDF  
(Data Field plus 5–digit add–on data field)  
(Printable Data Field)  
STOP  
(Ends Bar Code command)  
(New Bar Code command)  
BARCODE  
UPC–A+5;VSCAN;H12;DARK;39;50  
(Vertical Dark UPC–A, 5–digit add–on,  
H 1.2, SR 39, SC 50)  
*1234567887655555*  
(Data Field plus 5–digit add–on data field)  
(Printable Data Field)  
PDF  
STOP  
(Ends Bar Code command)  
END  
(Terminates Create Form Mode)  
(Executes the form, form count of 1)  
~EXECUTE;UPCA;1  
SC 50  
SR 39  
Figure 5–28. Sample UPC–A Bar Codes with Add–On Data  
5–110  
Bar Codes  
 
UPC–E and UPC–E0  
The UPC–E and UPC–E0 bar code structure is shown in Figure 5–29 and  
described on the following pages.  
START  
CODE  
DATA  
QUIET  
ZONE  
QUIET  
ZONE  
2– or 5–  
DIGIT  
ADD–ON  
CODE  
CHECK  
DIGIT  
FIELD  
HEIGHT  
N
C
STOP  
CODE  
CHECK  
DIGIT  
CHARACTER  
NUMBER  
SYSTEM  
CHARACTER  
OPTIONAL  
READABLE  
NUMBER SYSTEM  
CHARACTER FIELD DATA FIELD  
STOP  
CODE  
SR, SC  
POSITION  
2– or 5–  
DIGIT  
ADD–ON  
CODE  
QUIET  
ZONE  
QUIET  
ZONE  
HEIGHT  
CHECK  
DIGIT  
DATA  
FIELD  
C
N
CHECK DIGIT  
CHARACTER  
NUMBER SYSTEM  
CHARACTER  
2– or 5–  
DIGIT  
ADD–ON  
CODE  
2– or 5–  
DIGIT  
ADD–ON  
CODE  
CHECK  
DIGIT  
CHARACTER  
CHECK  
DIGIT  
CHARACTER  
C
C
QUIET  
ZONE  
QUIET  
ZONE  
SR, SC  
POSITION  
SR, SC  
POSITION  
STOP CODE  
STOP CODE  
CHECK  
DIGIT  
CHECK  
DIGIT  
DATA  
DATA  
FIELD  
OPTIONAL  
READABLE  
DATA  
OPTIONAL  
READABLE  
DATA  
FIELD  
FIELD  
FIELD  
NUMBER  
SYSTEM  
CHARACTER  
FIELD  
NUMBER  
SYSTEM  
CHARACTER  
FIELD  
START CODE  
START CODE  
NUMBER  
NUMBER  
N
N
QUIET  
ZONE  
QUIET  
ZONE  
SYSTEM  
SYSTEM  
CHARACTER  
CHARACTER  
HEIGHT  
HEIGHT  
Figure 5–29. UPC–E and UPC–E0 Structure  
Bar Codes  
5–111  
 
Quiet Zone  
Quiet zones extend on both ends of the bar code to permit the scan to begin  
and end in a blank area. The IGP/PGL automatically produces an  
11–module wide left quiet zone. You must provide sufficient space  
(minimum of seven modules) on the form for the right quiet zone. The  
number system character is also printed automatically in the left quiet zone.  
Start/Stop Codes  
The start/stop codes are special character codes marking those portions of  
the bar code. These codes are automatically provided.  
Number System Character  
The number system character field for all UPC–E and UPC–E0 bar codes  
must be zero.  
Data Field  
The bar code symbol uses a series of varying width bars and spaces to  
represent a limited character set (numbers 0–9 and Special Characters Start  
and Stop). The bars and spaces vary in width from one to four modules.  
Each character consists of two bars and two spaces that total seven  
modules.  
For UPC–E, eleven digits are expected, which are compressed down to the  
six encoded symbol characters. For UPC–E0, six compressed digits are  
expected.  
The optional 2– or 5–digit add–on data field is placed at the end of the bar  
code and typically identifies a periodical issue number or price,  
respectively.  
Readable Data  
The human readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar  
code data. It can either be suppressed or printed above or below the bar  
code symbol.  
Check Digit  
The modulo–10 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the  
bar code symbol. The check digit verifies accurate scanning. The number  
system character is included in the check digit algorithm.  
5–112  
Bar Codes  
 
UPC–E and UPC–E0 Command Format  
BARCODE  
UPC-E or UPC-EO [+n]; [VSCAN;] [MAG;] [Hn[.m];] [BFn;] [DARK;]  
SR; SC  
[(D)data field(D)]  
[PDF [;LOC] [;FONT]]  
STOP  
BARCODE  
The Bar Code command; enter BARCODE.  
type  
Designates bar code type UPC–E or UPC–E0; enter  
UPC–E or UPC–E0.  
+n  
Optional parameter to provide a 2– or 5–digit add–on  
code at the end of the bar code. Enter plus (+) and a  
value of 2 or 5. The first bar of the add–on code is  
separated by nine modules from the last bar of the UPC  
symbol and a left guard pattern.  
VSCAN  
Optional parameter to orient the bar code structure  
vertically. To select a vertical bar code, enter VSCAN.  
If VSCAN is not entered, the bar code is horizontal.  
MAG  
Optional parameter to magnify (horizontally expand)  
the bar code symbol. The magnification default value  
is X1. Enter a magnification value to increase the  
magnification. Increasing the magnification adjusts  
printed character density.  
You can also use XR or XRD as defined on page 5–4.  
(You must specify 8 digits for MAG for variable ratio.)  
Hn[.m]  
Optional parameter to adjust the overall height  
(vertical expansion) of the bar code symbol (including  
the upper and lower 0.1–inch guard bands and any  
human readable data). Height adjustments are made in  
0.1–inch increments; enter H and a value from 4 to 99  
to select height adjustments from 0.4 to 9.9 inches. The  
default value is 1.3 inches.  
.m is an additional number of dots for the bar code  
height. (Dots are in the current dot scale.)  
Bar Codes  
5–113  
 
BFn  
Optional parameter for assigning a dynamic bar code  
data field location on a form. With this parameter, the  
actual data for the bar code data field is dynamically  
provided during the Execute Form Mode; the data is  
not specified during the Create Form Mode. To use this  
field:  
a. Enter BF.  
b. Replace n with a number ranging from 1 to 255  
to identify the bar code field. The SR and SC  
parameters specify the exact location of the bar  
code field identified by n.  
c. The length of the data field need not be  
specified, since it is fixed at 6 or 11 digits, plus  
any add–on data.  
d. The information for the data field is entered  
dynamically during the Execute Form Mode.  
(Refer to “Execute Form: Dynamic Bar Code  
Data” on page 4–55 in the “Commands”  
chapter.) Do not use the data field parameter to  
enter data when the BFn parameters are used.  
However, refer to the data field description for  
available characters.  
DARK  
Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar  
codes. Enter DARK. Refer to “Dark Printing” on page  
4–10 for more information.  
SR  
Defines the starting row for the bar code. Enter a value  
ranging from row 1 to one less than the length of the  
form. Character row or dot row is specified based on  
the Scale command (page 4–88), or use the CP.DP  
format (page 4–7).  
SC  
Defines the starting column of the bar code. Enter a  
value ranging from column 1 to one less than the width  
of the form. Character column or dot column is  
specified based on the Scale command (page 4–88), or  
use the CP.DP format (page 4–7).  
5–114  
Bar Codes  
 
D
The printable character (delimiter) identifying the start  
and finish of the data field. Enter any printable  
character other than a slash (/), the SFCC, or a  
character used within the data. The same character  
must be used at both ends of the data field but it will  
not print with the data.  
data field  
The characters available for the data field are 0 through  
9 (30 through 39 hex, respectively).  
For UPC–E, eleven digits are expected: Enter the  
number system character first by entering 0; followed  
by the five–digit Manufacturer Number; ending with  
the five–digit Item Number. The Manufacturing  
Number and Item Number sequences must conform to  
one of the number pattern sequences shown in  
Table 5–17.  
The IGP/PGL will compress the 11 characters of data  
down to the six encoded UPC–E symbol characters.  
Include the 2– or 5–digit add–on data within the  
delimiter at the end of this data field.  
For UPC–E0, six digits are expected. These six digits  
must be a valid compressed UPC–E number.  
Otherwise, Error 96 (bar code data field has illegal  
number) will be generated.  
PDF  
Optional parameter which affects printing of the  
human readable data field. The data field will print  
automatically unless the PDF–suppress command is  
specified in the FONT parameter. UCR-B characters  
can be printed above or below the bar code symbol.  
This parameter is not allowed if a null data field is  
specified. If the PDF is not entered in the UPC–E  
command format, the data field automatically prints in  
OCR–B.  
Bar Codes  
5–115  
 
LOC  
Optional parameter to identify the location of the  
printable data field. The default value is B, locating the  
human readable data below the bar code. A locates the  
printable data field above bar code. To compensate for  
printing the 0.1–inch high data, the height of the bar  
code body is reduced 0.1–inch.  
FONT  
Optional parameter to select the font for the human  
readable data field. The default font type for UPC–E  
bar codes is OCR–B; if no PDF command is entered in  
the command format, the data field will print  
automatically in OCR–B. Entering X will also  
designate the OCR–B type font. Enter N to select the  
normal ASCII 10 cpi font; enter O to select the  
OCR–A 10 cpi font. Enter S to suppress printing the  
data field and the trailing lower portions of the UPC  
bar code.  
STOP  
Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP/PGL  
continues in the Create Form Mode. Enter STOP. If  
STOP is not entered, an error message results.  
5–116  
Bar Codes  
 
Table 5–16. Eleven Digit Compression  
1. Manufacturer’s Number  
Product Numbers that can be used 00000–00999  
X
X
X
X
X
X
0
1
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
( ___ ___ )  
first two digits of  
manufacturer’s  
number  
( ___ ___ ___ ) ( ___ )  
last three digits  
of the product  
number  
third digit of the  
manufacturer’s  
number, use 0  
thru 2 only  
2. Manufacturer’s Number  
Product Numbers that can be used 00000–00999  
X
X
X
3
9
0
0
0
0
( ___ ___ ___ )  
first three digits of  
manufacturer’s  
number  
( ___ ___ )  
( 3  
depends on how  
many digits appear in  
the manufacturer’s  
number  
)
X
last two digits  
of the product  
number, use  
00–99 only  
3. Manufacturer’s Number  
Product Numbers that can be used 00000–00999  
X
X
X
X
0
( ___ ___ ___ ___ ) ( ___ )  
( 4  
)
first four digits of  
manufacturer’s  
number  
last digit of  
product  
number, use  
0–9 only  
depends on how  
many digits appear in  
the manufacturer’s  
number  
4. Manufacturer’s Number  
Product Numbers that can be used 00000–00999  
X
X
X
X
X
( ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ )  
( ___ )  
all five digits of  
manufacturer’s number  
last digit of product  
number, use 5–9 only  
Bar Codes  
5–117  
 
Table 5–17. Six–Digit Zero Expansion  
if the 6 digit number ends with:  
(1)  
then the MFPS Number is:  
and the Product Number is:  
0
the first 2 digits (of the zero  
suppressed number) plus 000  
00 plus the THIRD, FOURTH  
and FIFTH digit (of the zero  
suppressed number)  
00456  
Example: 124560  
(2)  
12000  
1
the first two digits plus 100  
same as above  
Example: 275831  
(3)  
27100  
00583  
2
the first two digits plus 200  
same as above  
Example: 412022  
(4)  
41200  
00202  
3
the first three digits plus 00  
000 plus the FOURTH and  
FIFTH digit  
Example: 876543  
(5)  
87600  
00007  
4
the first four digits plus 0  
0000 plus the FIFTH digit  
Example: 753774  
(6) 5, 6, 7, 8, 9  
75370  
00007  
the first five digits of the zero  
suppressed number  
21375  
0000 plus the SIXTH digit  
Examples: 213756  
517019  
00006  
00009  
51701  
5–118  
Bar Codes  
 
UPC–E and UPC–E0 Example  
Figure 5–30 illustrates a horizontal and vertical UPC–E bar code generated  
by the following program:  
~CREATE;UPCE  
BARCODE  
(Enter Create Form Mode)  
(Bar Code command)  
UPC–E+2;H9;DARK;34;15 (Dark Code UPC–E, 2–digit add–on,  
H 0.9, at SR 34, SC 15)  
*0927400000522*  
PDF  
(Data Field plus the 2–digit add–on data field)  
(Printable Data Field)  
STOP  
(Ends Bar Code command)  
BARCODE  
(New Bar Code command)  
UPC–E0+2;VSCAN;H10;DARK;34;50  
(Vertical Dark UPC–E0, 2–digit add–on,  
H 1.0, at SR 34, SC 50)  
*92745422*  
(Data Field plus the 2–digit add–on data field)  
(Printable Data Field)  
PDF  
STOP  
(Ends Bar Code command)  
END  
(Terminates Create Form Mode)  
(Executes the form, form count of 1)  
~EXECUTE;UPCE;1  
SC 50  
SR 34  
UPC–E  
UPC–E0  
Figure 5–30. Sample UPC–E Bar Codes  
Bar Codes  
5–119  
 
Incremental Bar Code Fields  
With the incremental bar code fields feature, you can update bar code (and  
alphanumeric) data fields in a numeric or alphabetical manner automatically  
with just one set of data sent from the host computer. You can print up to  
65,535 forms with incremental fields automatically updated.  
NOTE: Throughout the discussion of incremental fields, the term  
“increment” or “incremental” means the field is automatically  
updated by a specified amount (or increment). You can actually  
increment the field by a positive amount (added) or a negative  
amount (subtracted) as specified within the command.  
You can use bar code incremental fields with fixed (static) data input as part  
of the Create Form Mode, or with dynamic data supplied in the Execute  
Form Mode. New formats and parameters are required in the bar code  
commands for static and dynamic incremental fields.  
In addition, the Execute Form command requires a new format and  
parameters when you use incremental fields with dynamic data. You can  
increment or decrement incremental fields, repeat at specified intervals  
before updating, and reset to the starting value after a specified number of  
increments.  
5–120  
Bar Codes  
 
Incrementing Bar Code Data  
The IGP/PGL internally counts incremental static (fixed) bar code data  
fields. A maximum of 255 incremental fixed bar code data fields are allowed  
per form.  
Incrementing is controlled with the STEPMASK and STARTDATA  
command parameters as described in Table 5–18. The parameters are part of  
the bar code command or part of the Execute command when using the  
Incremental Bar Code Dynamic Data command.  
The STEPMASK parameter performs three functions:  
1. It defines the increment amount (step);  
2. It defines the number of characters allowed in the data field  
(STARTDATA); and  
3. It provides a “mask” to link or unlink subfields of data for individual  
incremental activity. The data provided in the STEPMASK field  
combined with the data in the STARTDATA field determine the result of  
these functions.  
Table 5–18. Incremental Bar Code Data  
STEPMASK  
STARTDATA  
Character Type and Function  
Alpha characters are incremented by amount in  
STEPMASK field.  
0 – 9  
A – Z  
Numeric characters are incremented by amount in  
STEPMASK field.  
0 – 9  
0 – 9  
0 – 9  
Same character type as character in the next right ad  
jacent, linked increment position. Character type is  
numeric if in the least significant position.  
-
Space  
0 – 9  
Not A – Z  
or 0 – 9  
Error  
Non–incrementing alphanumeric character  
Linked, non–incrementing alphanumeric character  
Not 0 – 9  
or L  
Any  
L
Any  
Bar Codes  
5–121  
 
The increment amount is defined by the numeric value of the STEPMASK  
data. For example, a STEPMASK value of 1 increments the STARTDATA  
by 1; a STEPMASK value of 2 increments the STARTDATA by 2.  
The maximum number of characters allowed in the STARTDATA is defined  
by the number of characters in the STEPMASK field and depends on the  
specific type of bar code; the STARTDATA field cannot contain more  
characters than used in the STEPMASK field and can only contain the  
number and type of characters allowed by the bar code.  
Linked and unlinked masking of subfields within the STARTDATA is  
defined by using the L value in the STEPMASK field. L indicates linked but  
nonincrementing data in the corresponding position of the STARTDATA  
field. Any alphanumeric character other than L in the STEPMASK field  
indicates a nonincrementing, non–linked STARTDATA subfield.  
The following examples illustrate incrementing of bar code data fields. All  
cases in the examples use a repeat count parameter value of 1 and a reset  
count parameter value of 0. Incremental bar code data is generated  
identically to incremental alphanumeric data except the IGP/PGL does not  
add leading spaces to bar code data.  
NOTE: In the following bar code examples, the value of the data is  
shown automatically incrementing. In practical applications, the  
bar code itself would print corresponding to the incremented  
data as shown in the Auto Increment Fields Example on page  
6–14 in the “Commands” chapter.  
5–122  
Bar Codes  
 
Description  
Value  
STARTDATA:  
STEPMASK:  
ABC123  
000001  
Linked subfields: ABC and 123  
RPT = 1  
RST = 0  
Results:  
ABC123  
ABC124  
......  
......  
......  
ABC999  
ABD000  
......  
......  
......  
ZZZ999  
AAA000  
Description  
Value  
STARTDATA:  
STEPMASK:  
1ABC123  
0LLL001  
T
wo separate, but linked numeric  
subfields: 1 and 123, while  
fixed data ABC is nonincrementing  
RPT = 1  
Results:  
1ABC123  
RST = 0  
1ABC124  
. ...  
. ...  
. ...  
1ABC999  
2ABC000  
Description  
Value  
STARTDATA:  
STEPMASK:  
ABC123  
001XX1  
T
wo separate, unlinked  
subfields: ABC and 3,  
while fixed data 1 and 2 is  
nonincrementing  
RPT = 1  
Results:  
ABC123  
ABD124  
RST = 0  
ABE125  
. .  
. .  
. .  
ABI129  
ABJ120  
Bar Codes  
5–123  
 
Incremental Bar Code Fixed Data Fields  
The Incremental Bar Code Fixed Data Fields command is a variation of the  
standard IGP/PGL bar code commands. Use this command with the  
appropriate parameters from the standard bar code command when automatic  
incrementing of fixed bar code data fields is required.  
The Incremental Bar Code Fixed Data Fields command format is shown and  
defined below. (Incremental command parameters are shown in boldface  
type; standard bar code command parameters and optional nonincremental  
parameters are shown in italics.)  
BARCODE  
type; [VSCAN;] [MAG;] [Hn;] I; [DARK;] SR; SC  
[idir] STEPMASK; [RPTn;] [RSTn;] (D)STARTDATA(D)  
[PDF [;LOC] [;FONT]]  
STOP  
I
Identifies this bar code command as an Incremental  
Bar Code command; enter I.  
idir  
The optional increment direction parameter to specify  
an increment (add) or decrement (subtract) to the data.  
Enter a plus sign (+) or leave the field blank to  
increment (the default). Enter a minus sign (–) to  
decrement.  
STEPMASK  
Defines the increment amount (step), number of  
character positions in the data field, and provides a  
mask to control the increment function on specific  
parts of the data. Refer to “Incrementing Bar Code  
Data” on page 5–121 for complete information on  
STEPMASK parameter values.  
RPTn  
The optional incremental repeat count parameter to  
specify the number of times a particular field value  
will repeat before it is incremented. A repeated field  
value is useful when printing multiple rows/columns of  
identical labels before increasing to the next value.  
5–124  
Bar Codes  
 
To use the repeat count parameter, enter RPT and  
replace n with a numeric value ranging from 1 to  
65,535 to specify the repeat count.  
The default repeat count parameter is 1, which will  
increment the field value each time it is printed.  
RSTn  
The optional incremental reset count parameter to  
specify the number of times an incremented field is  
printed (on one or more forms) before it is reset to the  
starting value. A reset count is useful when printing a  
hierarchy of fields where a low–level field generates a  
sequence of numbers, is reset, and the next higher field  
level is incremented (such as in a unit/box/carton  
application).  
To use the reset count parameter, enter RST and  
replace n with a number ranging from 1 to 65,535 to  
specify the reset count. The default reset count value  
is 0.  
STARTDATA  
Defines the starting value of the incrementing field.  
The maximum amount of STARTDATA characters  
must be less than or equal to the number of characters  
in the STEPMASK field. Characters allowed for  
incrementing fields is based on the type of bar code;  
refer to the individual bar code descriptions for  
information on valid type and quantity of data  
characters.  
The STARTDATA must be enclosed within standard  
printable character delimiters just as a standard bar  
code data field is enclosed within delimiters.  
Bar Codes  
5–125  
 
~CREATE;TEST;288  
VDUP;3;6  
BARCODE  
C3/9;H7;I;6;5  
–00001;*12345*  
PDF  
(Enters Create Form mode)  
(Bar code command)  
(Printable data field)  
STOP  
(Ends bar code command)  
VDUP;OFF  
END  
~EXECUTE;TEST  
(Terminates Create Form mode)  
(Prints form)  
~NORMAL  
5–126  
Bar Codes  
 
Incremental Bar Code Dynamic Data Fields  
The Incremental Bar Code Dynamic Data Field command specifies the  
location and size of the incremental dynamic data field during the Create  
Form Mode. STEPMASK and STARTDATA parameters are supplied in the  
Execute command during the Execute Form Mode. As with standard  
dynamic data fields, incremental dynamic data fields allow you to change the  
starting data without changing the form definition program. Additionally,  
you can also change the increment parameters with each new job without  
changing the form definition program.  
The Incremental Bar Code Dynamic Data Fields command is a variation of  
the standard IGP/PGL bar code commands. Use this command with the  
appropriate parameters from the standard bar code command when automatic  
incrementing of dynamic bar code data fields is required. The Incremental  
Bar Code Dynamic Data Fields command format is shown and defined  
below. (Incremental command parameters are shown in boldface type;  
standard bar code command parameters and optional nonincremental  
parameters are shown in italics.)  
BARCODE  
type; [VSCAN;] [MAG;] [Hn;] IBFn;L [DARK;] SR; SC  
[PDF [;LOC] [;FONT]]  
STOP  
IBFn;L  
Identifies this bar code command as an Incremental  
Bar Code Dynamic Data Field command. The  
command parameter string identifies the incremental  
dynamic data field location on the form and defines the  
length of the bar code data. If these parameters are  
used, do not enter the STEPMASK and STARTDATA  
parameters in the Create Form Mode; enter them  
dynamically during the Execute Form Mode. To use  
the incremental dynamic data field:  
a. Enter IBF to specify an incremental bar code  
dynamic data field.  
b. Replace n with a number ranging from 1 to 255  
to identify the bar code string location on the  
form. The standard bar code SR and SC  
command parameters specify the exact location  
of the field identified by n.  
Bar Codes  
5–127  
 
c. Replace L with a number equal to the number of  
characters in the dynamic bar code string  
(STARTDATA) ranging from 1 to 1024. The  
number of characters and type of characters  
depends on the type of bar code used. Refer to  
the individual bar code descriptions for  
information on type and quantity of data allowed  
for the specific bar code type.  
d. Dynamically enter the STEPMASK and  
STARTDATA parameters in the Execute Form  
Mode. The length of the data must be less than  
or equal to the value assigned to the length (L)  
parameter. Refer to “Execute Form: Incremental  
Dynamic Data” on page 4–56 in the  
“Commands” chapter for more information.  
Duplicating Incremental Bar Code Fields  
Fixed and dynamic incremental bar code data fields are duplicated  
horizontally and vertically in the same way that incremental alphanumeric  
fixed and dynamic data fields are duplicated. Refer to page 4–26 in the  
“Commands” chapter for more information on duplicating incremental data.  
5–128  
Bar Codes